JP2017153805A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance interest in a game of a game machine including a privilege determination game for determining whether or not privilege is granted on the basis of presence or absence of V passage during a special game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first specific round game for opening a V attacker in a long-opening pattern and for operating a movable piece inside the V attacker; a second specific round game for opening the V attacker in a short-opening pattern and for operating the movable piece inside the V attacker; and a non-specific round game for opening the V attacker in a predetermined opening pattern and for preventing the movable piece inside the V attacker from being operated. An opening pattern of the V attacker during an execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed in a V passage schedule jackpot is set to be the same as an opening pattern of the V attacker during the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed in a V non-passage scheduled jackpot.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and if the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a predetermined benefit can be given to the player Those that perform special games are known. In this type of gaming machine, in addition to special games, the variation time of identification information is shorter than usual, the frequency of game balls entering the starting port is higher than usual, and the identification information is in a specific manner. There is one that can give a predetermined privilege to a player, such as making the probability of stop display higher than usual. Regarding this privilege grant, during a special game, perform a “privilege decision game” that determines whether or not to grant a privilege based on whether or not a game ball that has entered a predetermined variable entrance is passed to a specific area, There is known a gaming machine that informs the result of this privilege determination game by production or the like (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-161615 A

  In a gaming machine equipped with a privilege-determining game as described above, the possibility of a game ball passing through a specific area is referred to as a variable entrance related to the passage of the game ball to the specific area (hereinafter referred to as “specific variable entrance"). Generally, it is different depending on the open pattern. However, in such a configuration, for example, in the case of a special game, the player watches the opening pattern (opening operation) of the specific variable entrance, so that the early stage when the specific variable entrance starts to open. That is, there is a case where the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of passage, etc. can be determined as soon as the privilege determination game starts. In this way, if the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area or the presence / absence of a pass can be determined at the start of the privilege determination game, before the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) Before the result of the game is notified, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and the presence / absence of the pass, etc. will be known, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the bonus decision game and the dilution of the existence value. is there.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the purpose of the present invention is to make it difficult to discriminate (see) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area in a privilege determination game, whether or not it passes, The purpose is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a privilege determination game.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention employs the following configuration.
That is, the gaming machine of the first invention is
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows the game ball to enter by closing, and allows the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
The variable entrance is openable in a predetermined opening pattern in the round game,
As the opening pattern of the variable entrance, at least a first opening pattern in which the opening time of the variable entrance is a predetermined time, and a second in which the opening time is shorter than the first opening pattern. An opening pattern,
As the round game, at least,
A first specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the first opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A second specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the second opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A non-specific round game that opens the variable entrance in a predetermined opening pattern and does not operate the movable member,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the first specific round game or the second specific round game,
One or both of a previous round game that continues before the predetermined number of times and a rear round game that continues after the predetermined number of times, and either or both of the previous round game and the subsequent round game are It can be executed as a specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game capable of executing the first specific round game and the non-specific round game, and a second special game capable of executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game, Have
In the first special game, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, the variable entrance opening pattern in the execution period and the second special game When the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, the opening pattern of the variable entrance in the execution period is the same.

  According to the gaming machine of the first invention, the opening pattern (first opening pattern) of the variable entrance when the first specific round game is executed is the variable entrance when the second specific round game is executed. Since the opening time is longer than the opening pattern of the mouth (second opening pattern), the first specific round game has a higher possibility of entering the game ball into the variable entrance than the second specific round game (incoming ball) Is easier). For this reason, in the first specific round game, the possibility that the game ball is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area is higher than that in the second specific round game. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable entrance is not guided to the specific area and does not pass through the specific area. In the gaming machine of the first invention, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the variable entrance opening pattern through the round game and the second special game When the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game is the same. For this reason, it becomes difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

  Note that “having one or both of the previous round game following the predetermined number of times and the subsequent round game following the predetermined number of times” means that the round game following the predetermined number of times is the predetermined number of times. Including the case where it exists before, the case where it exists after the predetermined number of times, and the case where it exists before and after the predetermined number of times. In addition, “one or both of the previous round game and the subsequent round game can be executed as the non-specific round game” means that the round game existing before the predetermined number of times is executed as the non-specific round game. And a case where a round game existing after a predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game and a case where a round game existing before and after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game. In addition, for the “first specific round game and the non-specific round game” in the first special game and “the second specific round game and the non-specific round game” in the second special game, the specific round game (first specific game) The execution order of the round game, the second specific round game) and the non-specific round game may be the first (or the second). That is, even if the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is “first” and the non-specific round game is “after”, the non-specific round game is “first” and the specific round game (first Either “1” specific round game or “2nd specific round game” may be “after”. In addition, “the execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed” refers to the start of one of the first specific round game and the non-specific round game. The period until the end of the other round game is indicated, and “the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed” means the second specific round game and the non-specific round game. Indicates the period from the start of one of the round games to the end of the other round game.

The gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention described above,
There is at least one previous round game before the predetermined number of times, and the previous round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

  According to the gaming machine of the second invention, the first special game that executes at least one round game that follows the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least one that follows the second specific round game. A specification comprising a second special game for executing a round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) next to at least one non-specific round game ) In a specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) to execute), variable through the one non-specific round game and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) The opening pattern of the entrance is the same for the first special game and the second special game. This makes it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (the first special game or the second special game) in the specification.

The gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the first invention or the second invention described above,
There is at least one after-round game after the predetermined number of times, and the after-round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

  According to the gaming machine of the third invention, the first special game that executes at least one round game that follows the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least one time that follows the second specific round game A specification comprising a second special game for executing a round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, at least one non-specific round game following a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In a specification including a special game to be executed (first special game, second special game), a variable entrance opening pattern through a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) and a non-specific round game Can be made the same in the first special game and the second special game. This makes it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (the first special game or the second special game) in the specification. Note that the specification can include the specification according to the second invention. That is, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is executed next to at least one non-specific round game, and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In the specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) for executing at least one non-specific round game next to the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through each round game is designated as the first special game. It is possible to make the same between the game and the second special game.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects of the invention described above.
The predetermined number of round games is a first round game or a second round game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth invention, from the beginning of the special game, the variable entrance is opened with the same opening pattern regardless of whether the special game is the first special game or the second special game. It becomes. Thereby, it is difficult to determine whether the special game is the first special game or the second special game from the beginning of the special game, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  According to the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a privilege determination game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the kind of jackpot and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a special electric accessory processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart of an input / output number coincidence determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start. It is a flowchart of a specific effect start process. It is a schematic diagram of a 2nd big winning device. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with jackpot classification and ending time. 7 is a timing chart showing a relationship between an opening pattern for 7R fourth big hit and an opening pattern for 7R fifth big hit. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between V attacker and a specific area | region in V round. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between V attacker (short opening | release) and a specific area | region in V round. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between V attacker (long open) and a specific area | region in V round. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the specific effect performed with an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the specific effect performed with an image display apparatus. 12 is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing (big hit game) according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of the 1st big winning opening closing process of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the 2nd big winning opening closing process of Example 2. 10 is a flowchart of an input / output number match determination process according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of round counter subtraction processing according to the second embodiment. 12 is a timing chart showing a big hit game according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing according to the third embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the confrontation effect pattern determination table of Example 3. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing a relationship between an opening pattern for 7R fourth big hit and an opening pattern for 7R fifth big hit according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the 7R fourth big hit opening pattern and the 7R fifth big hit opening pattern of Modification 2 of Example 1. FIG. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with jackpot classification and an ending effect.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and can be opened and closed.

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. And simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good. In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. In addition, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, so that a game ball once guided to the game area can be prevented from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display a variation display in synchronization with a variation display of a first special symbol and a variation display of a second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b includes, for example, three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The left symbol display area displays the left effect symbol 8L, and the middle symbol display area displays the medium effect. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on a first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as “first special symbol display unit”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”) (that is, the special symbol validity determination) (Simply “success / failure determination”) are displayed so that the player can easily recognize them. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, a three-digit identical doublet such as “777” (also referred to as “big hit effect design”), a preset chance symbol such as “135”, “ It is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a special symbol (also called “special symbol”) such as “3 * 3”. Also, in the event of a loss, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a rosette symbol (also referred to as a “delayed effect symbol”) in which at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is different. Is possible. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In the first embodiment, for the big hits other than the 2R big hit and 7R big hit, which will be described later, the symbol finalizing effect when the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed (determined display) is, for example, the display screen 7a It is assumed that the player is able to easily recognize the occurrence of the big hit (first production mode), such as stopping and displaying the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at the approximate center of the symbol display area 7b). For example, in the corner of the display screen 7a, it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of a big hit (second effect mode) by, for example, stopping and displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R small or shortening the stop display time. To do in. The positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be separately provided, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). . In addition, as a variation display mode of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode in which scroll display is performed in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect using the effect symbol as described above (the effect symbol game effect), the jackpot game effect that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot game, Demo production etc. are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a according to the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the stored number and the second feature of the first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The stored number of the second special figure hold displayed on the figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player.

  A center decorative body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged. Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting, the movable decorative member falls downward, and the movable decorative member 14 The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the member is visible. As a result, the player increases the sense of expectation for winning. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition is established, whether or not the first special symbol is true (first special symbol true / false) When the determination) is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the determination result.

  On the right side of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port”) having a variable second start port 21 that changes the ease of entering a game ball. Is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and if a predetermined condition is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined (second special symbol determination) ) Is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the determination result. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member (blade member) 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. The movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  To the right of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable winning opening”) having a first big winning opening 30 and a second big winning opening 35. And a second grand prize winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable pitch entrance”) provided in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the true first prize winning device 31 (first grand prize winning opening 30) is true. A second grand prize winning device 36 (second grand prize winning opening 35) is arranged on the top. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first grand prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable entrance 31 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter (open state). And can be changed.

  The second grand prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second variable entrance 36 is in an inaccessible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and in an enterable state (open state) in which a game ball can enter by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. And can be changed. In addition, the second grand prize winning device 36 identifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific area 49 through which a game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35 can pass and a game ball that has entered the second major prize opening 35. The movable piece 150 is configured to be guided (sorted) to the area 39 or the non-specific area 49. The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). The movable piece 150 is triggered by the opening of the second big prize opening 35, in other words, the opening operation of the opening / closing member 37. Operation starts. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not in operation (non-operating state), the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 is guided to the non-specific area 49 and the specific area. It is impossible to pass 39. On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39, and the specific area 39 can be passed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that at least one of the game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 35 has passed the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability changing operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big prize winning device 31. Details of the opening of the second big prize opening 35 (the opening operation of the opening and closing member 37) and the operation of the movable piece 150 will be described later. Note that the high probability state is one of the gaming benefits provided to the player separately from the special game.

  A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right region of the center decorative body 10 in the game region 3. Based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is obtained is obtained. When a predetermined condition is established, it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is opened. When the symbol success / failure determination is executed, the normal symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second start port 21 is opened. Furthermore, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game starts, the left strike is aimed at entering the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the winning / unjudging determination is based on the winning at the first starting port 20 and the gaming state has changed, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30, and the second The goal is to enter the big prize opening 35. When a game ball enters the first starting port, the second starting port, the first major winning port, the second major winning port, and the general winning port, the predetermined starting point is set in advance. A number of game balls (also called “prize balls”) are paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) for variably displaying and stopping the normal symbol. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  The main display 40 also includes a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination is successful, the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination. When the result is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the gaming state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be left-handed or left-handed. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later. The change display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the first start port 20 as an opportunity. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the second start port 21 as an opportunity. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed. The special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The result of lottery based on (special symbol success / failure determination, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. If the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information, specific mode) (that is, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), an open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed A special game (big hit game) is performed in which the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three “ijn” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R first big hit symbol). When the second big hit (12R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs “ijk” are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R second big hit symbol). When the third big hit (12R big hit) is reached, the three “ijl” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R third big hit symbol). When the fourth big hit (7R big hit) is reached, the four “jnop” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R fourth big hit symbol). In addition, when the fifth big hit (7R big hit) is reached, the four “mnop” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R fifth big hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two “lo” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (outage symbol). On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. For example, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is the sixth big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs “abd” are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R sixth big hit symbol). Also, when the seventh big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the four “cdeh” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R seventh big hit symbol). In addition, when the eighth big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs “cdgh” are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R eighth big hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs “eh” are turned on and the rest are turned off (out of symbol). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, such that light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like based on the received ball. The acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special diagram storage unit 85 a as the first special diagram reservation, and if it is the ball entering the second starting port 21, the second special diagram is stored. It is stored in the second special figure storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the change display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of entering, that is, the change of the special symbol Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”.

  Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current gaming state. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). If the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol is displayed in a state where only the “t” LED is lit, such as “s □ t ■”. Note that the off-normal symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol variation display is executed for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. is there.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is obtained based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map reservation in a general map storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

  The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Accordingly, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed, that is, when the normal symbol variation display is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not it is a normal symbol for the passage. The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the general map hold indicator 44 is composed of two “qr” LEDs, and displays the number of general map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. is there. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”) that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. )), A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, also referred to as “effect control unit”) that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and payout control that performs control related to game ball payout Substrate 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”), effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, effect first special figure hold indicator 103a, and effect second special symbol An image control board 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the hold display 103b and the like is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing the main control board 80 is provided at a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with an image control board storage case containing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107 and the image control board 100, and a sub control board storage containing the sub control board 90 on the image control board storage case. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 (the first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b) and the general figure storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big prize opening sensor 30a, a second big prize opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and a non-specification. The area sensor 49a and the general entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second big prize opening sensor 35a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second grand prize opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 35. is there. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second big prize opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 35. To do. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second start opening solenoid 24, a first large winning opening solenoid 33, a second large winning opening solenoid 38 and a movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also referred to as “driving means”. The second start opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first big winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. is there. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second big prize winning device 36. is there. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, a general diagram. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a firing direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a payout device 120 for paying out winning balls and balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like are stored. And a launching device 112 are connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as “launch control unit”). The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drives to pay out prize balls and pays out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect first special figure hold display 103a, and the effect second hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.) And image data such as background images. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, and performs a change display and a stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and the effect symbols are displayed by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining the colors. 8 is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the display result of 8 (result of the special symbol success / failure determination). Similarly, the production first special figure hold display 103a and the production second hold display 103b are also composed of two LEDs. Then, depending on whether the two LEDs are turned on / off, or a combination of colors, the production first special figure hold indicator 103a is a holding number displayed in the first production hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold indicator 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of held as the number of held displayed. Further, the production second special figure hold display device 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the hold number displayed in the second production hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold display device 43b. Be controlled. This is because the character design is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect design display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to display the effect design display area 7b (effect design display portion) of the display screen 7a. Such a display is provided because a part or all of the effect design, the first effect hold display unit, or the second effect hold display unit may not be visible by covering. . A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effect, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. In addition, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. (Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The movable decorative member 14 is visible only in part in FIG. 1, but is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 also includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). An effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

  Next, control related to the determination of success / failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, there are “big hit” and “off”. In the case of “big hit”, the “big hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41, and in the case of “out”, the “off symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined that the game is a big win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol displayed in a stopped state. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "hit game".

  There are several types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots are "15R (round) first jackpot", "12R second jackpot", "12R third jackpot", "7R fourth jackpot", "7R fifth jackpot" There are a total of 8 types of "15R 6 big hits", "2R 7 big hits" and "2R 8 big hits". “15R first big hit” and “15R sixth big hit” are big hits with 15 winning rounds of the first prize winning opening 30 (the first big winning prize opening 30 or the second big winning prize opening 35). “2 big wins” and “12R 3 big hits” are big wins with 12 winning rounds of the 1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35, and “7R 4 big hits” And “7R 5 big hits” are big wins with 7 winning rounds of the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35, “2R 7 big hits” and “2R The “eighth jackpot” is a jackpot in which the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) is two. In each of these big wins, only the second grand prize opening 35 (upper university prize opening) is opened while the first big prize opening 30 is closed in the first and second rounds. It is assumed that the first grand prize opening 30 (the lower university prize opening) and the second big prize opening 35 (the upper university prize opening) are opened in even-numbered rounds. That is, after the third round, the first grand prize opening 30 (the lower university prize opening) and the second major prize opening 35 (the upper university prize opening) are alternately opened (the large size shown in FIG. 6). (See the opening order column for the winning opening opening pattern). Note that a predetermined interval time (closing time) is set between each round, and in the first embodiment, the interval time between the first round and the second round, and the second round and the third round. The interval time between rounds is 2000 ms (2 seconds), and the interval time between other rounds is 200 ms (0.2 seconds).

  Here, the big winning opening opening pattern during the big hit game will be described. First, in the odd-numbered rounds after the third round, the first big prize opening 30 is opened until 25000 ms (25 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round, and is closed after the passage of 25000 ms (25 seconds), thereby completing the round. That is, the first big prize opening 30 is opened with an opening pattern of 25000 ms and an opening pattern of 1 opening. It is possible to easily enter a game ball into the first big winning opening 30 opened in this opening pattern by making a right strike. In the odd-numbered round, the second big prize opening 35 is kept in a closed state (a state where a ball cannot be entered, a state where a game ball cannot be received). On the other hand, in the third and subsequent rounds, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the round, and then a 1000 ms (1 second) closing is sandwiched between each opening. On the other hand, one opening of 1000 ms (1 second), one opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) are sequentially performed, and then the round is terminated. That is, the second big prize opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern of 23000 ms (second time) for opening and 5 times for opening (second number). The second big prize opening 35 that is opened in this opening pattern can be made to enter the game ball easily at the time of opening for the first 16000ms (16 seconds) by making a right strike, and at the other opening time. There may be a case where a ball is entered and a case where a ball is not entered. Note that in the even-numbered rounds, the first grand prize opening 30 is maintained in a closed state (a state where a ball cannot be entered, a state where a game ball cannot be received).

  Further, in the second round, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened, but the movable piece 150 is operated at the start of the opening (first opening start). Of the eight types of big hits described above, “15R first big hit”, “15R sixth big hit”, “12R second big hit”, “7R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” It is a big hit (hereinafter also referred to as “V pass planned big hit”) that opens the second big winning opening 35 in a manner that allows easy passage of game balls to 39. On the other hand, with respect to “12R third big hit”, “7R fifth big hit” and “2R eighth big hit”, the second big prize opening 35 is set in such a manner that it is difficult (impossible) to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. It is a big hit to be opened (hereinafter also referred to as “V hitting planned big hit”). The opening mode of the second grand prize opening 35 and the operation mode of the movable piece 150 in the second round will be described. In the “V pass expected jackpot”, the mode of opening / closing the second big winning hole 35 in the second round (opening pattern) ) In the same manner as the even-numbered rounds after the third round. Then, the operation control of the movable piece 150 is started with the opening (the first opening) when the second grand prize winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) elapses from the start of the round. Specifically, after 80 ms has passed since the first opening of the second grand prize opening 35 (that is, the start of the round), the operation state is set to 80 ms (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) and then the non-operation state (movable). One solenoid 151 is turned off), and after 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) has elapsed, the operation state is again set (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on), and this state is maintained until a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds) has elapsed. Maintain (see FIG. 52). For this reason, in the “V pass expected big hit”, the movable piece 150 is continuously in operation after 3000 ms (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the second round, and therefore 16000 ms (16 seconds) from the start of the second round. During the following 13000 ms (13 seconds), the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35 can pass through the specific area 39. In addition, even after the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds) is completed, the opening of 1000 ms (1 second), the opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), the opening of 1000 ms (1 second), and 1000 ms (1 second). 2 times of 1 second) are performed in order, so that the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 at the time of the opening can also pass through the specific area 39. As a result, the “V passing planned big hit” becomes a big hit with a high possibility that the gaming state after the big hit game will be in a high probability state described later. It should be noted that the second big winning opening 35 that is opened with such an opening pattern, that is, an opening time of 23000 ms (second time) and an opening pattern of 5 times (second number) (second opening operation) is right-handed. By performing the above, it is possible to easily enter the game ball at the first release time of 16000 ms (16 seconds), and at the time of other release, there may be a case where the ball is entered and a case where the ball is not entered.

  On the other hand, in the “V non-passing jackpot”, the movable piece 150 is controlled to operate in the same manner as the “V passing jackpot” from the start of the second round, and the second big prize opening 35 is set to 100 ms (from the start of the second round). 0.1 second) (open and close for a moment), and then close to end the round (see FIG. 51). That is, the second big prize opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern (third opening operation) of an opening time of 100 ms (third time) and an opening frequency of one (third number of times). For this reason, in the “V non-passing expected big hit”, the possibility that the game ball will enter the second grand prize opening 35 in the second round is extremely low (substantially impossible), and the game ball is in the specific area 39. The possibility of passing through is extremely low (substantially impossible). As a result, the “V non-passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot where the gaming state after the jackpot game is not likely to become a high probability state described later (in other words, a big hit, in other words, a normal state (low probability state) described later. It is a big hit with high possibility. As described above, in the first embodiment, whether or not the second round of the big hit game is set to the high probability state is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39. “Bonus decision game”.

  Also, in the first round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened, but the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35 is varied depending on the type of the big hit. That is, in the first round of “15R first big hit” and “15R sixth big hit”, the second big winning opening 35 is opened a plurality of times, and the mode of the opening / closing operation is the third round described above. It is the same as the subsequent even rounds. For this reason, in the first round of “15R first big hit” and “15R sixth big hit”, it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the second big winning opening 35 by making a right strike. In addition, the first round of “12R second big hit”, “7R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” (scheduled V passing big hit) is the above-mentioned “V non-passing big hit” (12R third big hit, 7R The second big prize opening 35 is opened in the same manner as the second round of the fifth big hit and the 2R eighth big hit). That is, the second grand prize winning opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the round, and then closed to end the round. Therefore, in the first round of “12R second big hit”, “7R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” (V pass expected big hit), the opening time is 100 ms (first time) and the number of times of opening (first time) Number of times) opening pattern (first opening operation), the second grand prize opening 35 is opened, and the possibility that the game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 is extremely low (substantially impossible). .

  The first rounds of “12R 3rd big hit”, “7R 5th big hit” and “2R 8th big hit” are the aforementioned “12R 2nd big hit”, “7R 4th big hit” and “2R 7th big hit”. In the form in which the first round and the second round are connected, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened a plurality of times (see FIG. 49). That is, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 in the first round of “12R third big hit”, “7R fifth big hit” and “2R eighth big hit” which are “V non-passing big hit” is “V pass Opening pattern of the first round (first opening operation) and opening pattern of the second round (second opening operation) of “scheduled big hit” “12R second big hit”, “7R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” ) In combination with an interval time (2000 ms in this case). Specifically, after the second grand prize opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 second) from the start of the round (first opening operation), it is opened for 16000 ms (16 seconds) after closing for 2000 ms, and then 1000 ms. (1 second) closing between each opening, 1 opening of 1000 ms (1 second), 1 opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), 2 opening of 1000 ms (1 second) ( The second opening operation) is performed in order. For this reason, the first rounds of “12R third big hit”, “7R fifth big hit” and “2R eighth big hit” seem to be “12R second big hit”, “7R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”. This is the same as the case where 1 to 2 rounds of “big hit” are performed (end of the second round) (see FIG. 49). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between “scheduled V pass big hits” and “V unscheduled big hits” (for example, “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit”) having the same number of rounds. In the first embodiment, the movable piece 150 (sorting member) for distributing whether or not to guide the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35 to the specific area 39 is operated only in the second round. Let it not work in other rounds. For this reason, for the player, when a big hit with round numbers “12”, “7”, “2” occurs, pay attention to the opening / closing operation of the second big prize opening 35 from the first round in the big hit game concerned Even so, it is difficult to determine whether or not the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high-probability state described later (whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39).

  In addition, the distribution probability for each big hit in the determination of success / failure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 35% for the 15R first big hit, 5% for the 12R second big hit, 30% for the 12R third big hit, and 7R fourth. The jackpot is 10% and the 7R fifth jackpot is 20%. If you divide it into a V-pass planned jackpot and a V-unscheduled jackpot, the V-passed jackpot is 50% and the V-unscheduled jackpot is 50%. Yes. On the other hand, the distribution probability for each jackpot in the determination of whether or not the second special symbol (special chart 2) is right is as follows: 15R first jackpot is 60%, 2R seventh jackpot is 20%, and 2R eighth jackpot is 20%. When the V passing planned jackpot and the V non-passing planned jackpot are divided, the V passing planned jackpot is 80% and the V non-passing jackpot is 20%. In other words, if the winning of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second start opening 21 that has become easy to enter by the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later, Compared to the case where the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit based on whether or not the first starting port 20 is entered, there is a higher possibility of a 15R big hit and a higher possibility of a V passing planned big hit. Thus, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game at the second start opening 21 rather than the big hit in the win / fail judgment (the big win lottery of the first special symbol) performed by the game ball entering the first start opening 20. It is set so that the possibility of winning a big hit in the winning / failing determination (second special symbol big hit lottery) performed by entering a ball is higher for the player. That is, the player plays a game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is increased.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether or not the big hit is made is based on a “special symbol winning / non-decision random number (also referred to as“ winning determination information ”)”. The determination is made on the basis of “a jackpot type determination random number (also referred to as“ symbol determination random number ”or“ symbol determination information ”)”. As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure determination random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 629”, and the big hit type determination random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”. In addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number, the random number (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes “variation pattern random number”. (Also referred to as “variation pattern information”).

  The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including a variation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 198”. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The random number for normal symbol determination is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol lottery). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of "0 to 240".

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by combining the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open extension function with respect to the special symbol and the normal symbol into the activated state or the deactivated state. . For the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the state in which the probability variation function is activated is referred to as “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as “normal state (also referred to as“ low probability state ”). " In the high probability state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the normal state. In other words, in the normal state, the success / failure determination is performed using the normal state jackpot determination table, but in the high probability state, the high probability state jackpot determination table having a large number of special symbol success / failure determination random numbers. Using this, it is determined whether or not it is correct (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short time state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is increased, and effective entry to the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure reservation) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) may be activated at the same time, or only one of them may be activated. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the special symbol variation time shortening function. That is, the probability changing function and the changing time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the short time state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-short time state. Therefore, in the time reduction state, the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the non-time reduction state. That is, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (ordinary symbol judgment) is performed using a normal symbol per-judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be hit is larger than the normal symbol per-judgment judgment table used in the non-time-saving state. (See FIG. 8C). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the normal symbol becomes a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) becomes higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the short time state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-short time state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (see FIG. 8D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the second start port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-short time state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the non-time-short state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second start port is in the open state during that period. Become. Also, if the result of the normal symbol win / fail determination is a win in the time-short state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

  In the situation where the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the case where these functions are not activated. Thus, the second start port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these functions are activated is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these functions are not activated is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls.

  In the high base state (high frequency state), all the above functions may not operate. That is, when the function is not activated by the activation of at least one of the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extension function and the number-of-opening times increase function of the variable winning device 22. However, it is sufficient that the second start port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game when any of 15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 15R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big hit is If the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game, the special symbol has a high probability state, the special symbol has a short time state, and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate base state”. The high-accuracy base state is terminated when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays are executed or when a big hit game is executed. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 39, the normal state of the special symbol, the short time state of the special symbol, and the high base state are set.

  In addition, the game state after the special game in the case of 12R third big hit and 2R eighth big hit is very difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game. While the special symbol is in the normal state, the special symbol is in the short time state and the high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low-accuracy base state”. The low-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the “highly accurate base state” is set.

  In addition, the game state after the special game in the case of the 7R fifth big hit is that it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, so that the normal state of the special symbol is reached. The special symbol becomes a non-time-short state and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the “highly accurate base state” is set.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state becomes a “highly accurate and high base state” due to the occurrence of the 12R second big hit, and the gaming state becomes a “low probability and high base state” due to the occurrence of the 12R third big hit. When the special game (big hit game) ends, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variation function is activated, that is, whether it is a high probability state or a normal state (low probability state) It is trying to become. A state in which it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high probability state or a normal state (low probability state) is referred to as a “probability non-notification state”. Similarly, when the gaming state becomes a “high probability and high base state” due to the occurrence of the 2R seventh big hit, and when the gaming state becomes the “low probability high base state” due to the occurrence of the 2R eighth big hit. The state after the end of the special game (big hit game) is the “probability non-notification state”. In this “probability non-notification state”, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is in a high probability state through the appearance (appearance) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as effects performed according to the progress of the game (substantially) Impossible). This “probability non-notification state” can be generated, for example, until a special symbol variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), which is the end condition of the “low probability base state”. On the other hand, if the gaming state becomes a “highly accurate and high base state” due to any occurrence of 15R 1st big hit, 7R 4th big hit or 15R 6th big hit, This is a state that is clear to the player and is a so-called “probability game state” for the player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, three gaming states of “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” can be set as the gaming state. In addition, a high probability state of a special symbol, a non-time-short state and a low base state of a special symbol, that is, a “highly accurate low base state” may be settable.

  In a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B by hitting right. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate. This makes it possible to obtain a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is present) rather than left-handed. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner, and notifies that it should be fired to the right game area.

  On the other hand, in the low base state (for example, the low probability low base state), it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A by left-handed. In the low base state, the second start port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and entering the first start port 20 is easier than entering the second start port 21. Because. Therefore, a left turn is made to enter the game ball into the first start port 20. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not to win special symbols) rather than making a right strike. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that it should be fired to the left game area.

  Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset Etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special diagram 1”, the “first special symbol”, and the second special symbol is “special symbol 2”. "Two second figure".

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is finished and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub-control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. To do. The command and the like output here include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a first big prize port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general winning hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored as prize ball information in the output buffer of the RAM. Also, a detection signal from a lower plate full detection sensor for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62 is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower plate full data.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. 7 includes the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started).

  Following normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), starting port sensor detection process (S204), general map movement process (S205), special figure movement process (S206), and specific area sensor detection process (S207) Then, a start ball entering process (S208) and a power-off monitoring process (S209) are executed. Thereafter, other processing (S210) not closely related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeated (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal figure holdings, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of holdings of the normal drawing provided in the RAM) is It is determined whether or not it is 4 or more (S302). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If the number of normal symbol reservation balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and a normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label -TRND-H, Fig. 7 (B)) of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the symbol is normal is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. Then, the obtained random number value (acquired information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the general symbol reserved storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If a game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if a game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S305), a special figure is displayed. 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached four (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not (S306). Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), Special figure 2 1 is added to the number of reserved balls (S307).

  Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for special symbol determination (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the big hit type The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number value shown in FIG. 7A is acquired), and the acquired random value (acquired) Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 2 balls in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b.

  Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). If no game ball has entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start port 20 (YES in S309), a special figure is displayed. The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure hold, specifically, the counter value for counting the number of the first special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not (S310). If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S310), the process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S310), Special figure 1 "1" is added to the number of reserved balls (S311).

  Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 7A). A numerical value is acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 balls in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal drawing operation process (S205), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401) NO at S403, YES at S403), normal symbol variation processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (both NO at S401 and S403, YES at S405), the normal symbol is fixed The process (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), the ordinary electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), it is first determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501), and if it is “0” (YES in S501). This process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not “0” (NO in S501), a later-described normal symbol success / failure determination process is performed (S502). Further, after the normal symbol success / failure determination processing (S502), normal symbol variation pattern selection processing is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is a short-time state, the ordinary symbol variation pattern with a 1 second variation time is selected. To do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time-short state, the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, after the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process is terminated. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol success / failure determination processing (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is a time reduction state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is in the time reduction state (YES in S602), the table for the time reduction state (the hit determination value is the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8C). Based on “0” to “239”), it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high-probability normal-winning determination (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time reduction state (in the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8C) ( It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on a low-probability standard winning / failing determination based on the winning determination values “0” and “1”), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning (per normal map) is determined in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per display to be stopped (per symbol in the general pattern) is determined (S607), and the per-normal symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection processing (S503), normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved storage in the ordinary figure storage area, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary figure storage area is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process ends. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the normal symbol operation status is set to “3” (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with the display result (the normal symbol or the normal symbol that has come off) according to the determination result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate (S804), this processing Finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), it is first determined whether or not the universal symbol flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is subsequently determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time reduction state is in effect (S902). If it is in the time-short state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time-short state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the release pattern in the short-time state is an release pattern in which the release for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the non-short-time state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time-short state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-short-time state is an open pattern in which a 0.2 second release is performed once as described above. Accordingly, “1” is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the setting of the release pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this processing is completed.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), it is first determined whether or not the end-of-usual flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win.

  If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the timing (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has been reached (S1003). If this is the case, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the timing (timing) for closing the second start port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened). (S1005). If not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished. If it has reached (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

  Then, following the closing process of the second start port 21 (S1006), the value of the second start port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is “0”. (S1008). If it is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the base map end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter is set to “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times if it is in the time-short state, and if it is in the non-time-short state. When the second start port 21 is opened once, it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, if the normal per-completion flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned off (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S206) subsequent to the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. If the “special figure operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), a special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed. If the “special figure operation status” is “2” (S1101) NO in S1103, YES in S1103), special symbol change processing (S1104) is performed, and if the “special symbol operation status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol is confirmed Processing (S1106) is performed, and when the “special drawing operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, and S1105), special electric accessory processing (S1107) as a big hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is “1” by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls (that is, the number of retained balls in Special Figure 2) at the second start port 21 is “0” (S1201). . Special Figure 2 If the number of reserved balls is “0” (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to the ball entering the second start port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is also “0” (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer waiting demo screen) (S1211). If so (YES in S1211), the processing is terminated. Otherwise (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

  In S1201, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not “0” (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more random number counter values acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21 The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) described later are performed in this order. Also, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” but the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 If there is one or more random number counter values acquired due to entering the first starting port 20, there is no memory, but a special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1207), which will be described later, Pattern selection processing (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the change display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is “0” (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol hold (the change display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol hold (the change display of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, the success / failure determination based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit for the player than the success / failure determination based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8B). )).

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202), first, as the determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first special figure reservation first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol success / failure random number counter stored in the corresponding RAM area is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). And if it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the big hit determination table for the normal state (the big hit determination value is “3” and “ 397 "), a determination is made as to whether it is correct (S1303). On the other hand, if the state is a high probability state (YES in S1302), the success / failure determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , “503”.

  When the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1304) is determined as “big hit” (YES in S1305), the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (label-TRND-AS) is read and shown in FIG. 8B. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1307), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned on (S1309), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1304) is not “big hit” (NO in S1305), the off symbol is determined (S1306), and the process ends. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Here, the jackpot determination (special symbol success / failure determination) and the jackpot type determination determination may be referred to as “determination”, respectively, and may be referred to as “determination” including which jackpot symbol will be obtained by performing the jackpot determination. Good. In addition, these results may be referred to as “determination results”.

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of four LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 7R lamp, a 12R lamp, and a 15R lamp. For example, when the 2R seventh big hit or the 2R eighth big hit is reached, the 2R lamp is turned on at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is determined and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as “2R ▲ 7RΔ12RΔ15RΔ” (for example, ▲: lit, Δ: unlit). Further, when the 7R fourth big hit or the 7R fifth big hit is reached, the 7R lamp is turned on at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ7R ▲ 12RΔ15RΔ”. When the 12R second big hit or the 12R third big hit is reached, the 12R lamp is turned on at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ7RΔ12R ▲ 15RΔ”. Further, when the 15R first big hit or the 15R fourth big hit is reached, the 15R lamp is turned on at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ7RΔ12RΔ15R ▲”.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), a special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) following the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time-short state (whether or not the time-short flag is ON) (S1401). If it is determined in S1401 that the time saving state is not set (NO in S1401), that is, if it is a non-time saving state, it is next determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1402). If it is determined in S1402 that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1402), refer to the non-time-short state big hit table (the portion corresponding to the non-time-short state and big hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Next, the process proceeds to S1404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1402 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is then determined whether the number of reserved special symbols is “1” or “2” (S1405). The reserved number here is the number of memories including the information for which the variation pattern is determined by this processing, and therefore the number of reserved memories is any one of “1 to 4”. If it is determined in S1405 that the number of holds is either “1” or “2” (YES in S1405), the first number-of-holds table (non-time reduction state among the variation pattern tables shown in FIG. 9) Further, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the part that falls off and corresponds to the number of reserved balls “1, 2” (S1406). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P4 to P7 is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1405 that the number of holdings is neither “1” nor “2”, that is, “3” or “4” (NO in S1405), the second holding number removal table Referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, the variation is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the non-time-short state and the out-of-range and the number of reserved balls “3, 4”. A pattern is selected (S1407). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. Further, the first reserved number deviation table is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a variation pattern of a relatively long variation time than the second reserved number deviation table. Further, the shortest changeable time (12000 ms) that can be selected is also set to be longer than that of the second reserved number removal table (4000 ms).

  If it is determined in S1401 that the time is short (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON (S1408). If it is determined in S1408 that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1408), the fluctuation pattern is referred with reference to the short-time state big hit table (the portion corresponding to the short-time state and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1408 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1408), it is then determined whether the number of holds is “1” (S1410). The number of reservations here is the same as described above, and the number of reservations is set to one of “1” to “4”. If it is determined in S1410 that the number of holdings is “1” (YES in S1410), the third holding number losing table (in the time-varying state and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. With reference to the corresponding part), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). In this embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P15 to P18 is selected. Further, when it is determined in S1410 that the number of holds is not “1”, that is, the number of holds is “2 to 4” (NO in S1410), a fourth number-of-holds table (shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the time-short state and the out of the variation pattern table and the portion corresponding to the number of reserved balls “2 to 4” (S1411). ). In this embodiment, one of the variation patterns P19 to P22 is selected. Here, the variation pattern selected in the short-time state and out-of-phase is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern selected in the non-time-short state and out-of-range. Yes. This is to speed up the digestion of the special figure reservation by making more variation patterns with a short variation time selected in the short-time state (the game in the short-time progresses rapidly).

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 23 is performed (S1404), and the processing is terminated. In other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. Further, the variation pattern designation command set in this process is included in a variation start command described later, and is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one level lower (for example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). , The address “0000” side) (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends.

  After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). The special figure 1 determination process (S1207), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Decision Processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1207), the processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this processing is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowermost area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read and processed.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the process (S1701 to S1712) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is shifted down by one (S2002). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends.

  After the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209) is executed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903). If it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (S1903). S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the probability variation counter is “0”, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not “0” (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

  In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time reduction for counting the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state is counted. The counter value is decremented by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter is “0” (S1909). If it is “0” (YES in S1909), the hour / hour flag is turned OFF (S1910). The process proceeds to S1911. If it is determined that the time flag is not ON (NO in S1907), and if it is determined that the value of the time counter is not “0” (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

  In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to “3” (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the special symbol variation display at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is subsequently determined whether or not the type of big hit is 15R big hit (15R first big hit or 15R sixth big hit) (S2002). If it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), the round counter value for counting the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is set to “15” (S2003) Transition to processing.

  If it is determined in S2002 that the type of big hit is not 15R big hit (NO in S2002), then it is determined whether the type of big hit is 12R big hit (12R second big hit or 12R third big hit) (S2004). If it is determined in S2004 that 12R is a big hit (YES in S2004), the round counter value is set to “12” (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the big hit type is not 12R big hit (NO in S2004), then it is determined whether the big hit type is 7R big hit (7R fourth big hit or 7R fifth big hit) (S2006). In S2006, when it is determined that 7R is a big hit (YES in S2006), the round counter value is set to “7” (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2009. If it is determined in S2006 that it is not 7R big hit (NO in S2006), since the big hit type is 2R big hit (2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit), set "2" to the value of the round counter (S2008) , Move to S2009 processing.

  In S2009, a winning opening opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. Here, the opening pattern of the big prize opening is determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6), and in this embodiment, the big winning opening that opens and closes in a specific round is fixed. Specifically, in any big win, the first and second rounds open and close the second big prize opening 35, and the third round (if the big hit is three rounds or more) opens and closes the first big prize opening 30. I am going to do it. On the other hand, although the same second big prize opening 35 is opened and closed in the first round in different big wins, the opening and closing pattern (opening pattern) may be different.

  That is, in the present embodiment, a winning pattern opening pattern is determined for each type of jackpot. Specifically, if it is a 15R first big hit, the release pattern for 15R first big hit is set, and the 15R first big hit release pattern is executed during the execution of the 15R first big hit game. . If 12R 2nd big hit is set, an open pattern for 12R 2nd big hit is set, if 12R 3rd big hit is set, an open pattern for 12R 3rd big hit is set, and if 7R 4th big hit, 7R 4th is set. Set an open pattern for big hit, set 7R fifth big hit open pattern for 7R fifth big hit, set 15R sixth big hit open pattern for 15R sixth big hit, set 2R 7th For big hits, an opening pattern for 2R seventh big hit is set, and for 2R eighth big hit, an opening pattern for 2R eighth big hit is set. Then, the corresponding jackpot opening pattern is executed in each jackpot game.

  In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2010). The opening command is determined by the type of jackpot, and is provided corresponding to each jackpot, such as a 15R first jackpot opening command, a 12R second jackpot opening command, and the like. Then, the corresponding opening period is subsequently executed by the set opening command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, in the case of 7R fourth big hit or 7R fifth big hit, a period of 1900 ms is set as the opening period, and in the case of other big hits, a period of 8000 ms is set as the opening period. Is set. The main control unit 80 transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub-control unit 90 that has received the opening command receives the opening command during the opening period. The corresponding predetermined game effect is performed. In S2011, a big hit game opening period is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to “4” (S2012). If it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to “1” (S2013), and the process is terminated.

[Special electric equipment processing (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory processing (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), Is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If NO is determined in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probability variation flag. If NO is determined in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time reduction flag. In other words, during the execution of the big hit game, the low probability state and the non-time-short state are controlled. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time-short state, the low base state is also controlled during the big hit game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening processes of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been completed (the big hit game has ended) in the big hit game. If it is determined that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is then determined whether it is the start time of the round (S2106). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, the determination is made based on whether the opening period ends and the timing for executing the first release processing of the first round. If the first round has already been started, the determination is made based on whether the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) has ended. The round is also simply referred to as “R” or “round game”.

  If it is determined in S2106 that it is the time to start a round (YES in S2106), a round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and a big prize opening process is performed (S2108). As a result, the special winning opening becomes open and a predetermined round starts. In S2107, a round start command capable of specifying the starting round is set, such as “1R start command” if the first round is started and “2R start command” if the second round is started. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201. Also, in the big winning opening opening process of S2108, a big winning opening opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed, and an opening pattern determined in the starting round is started.

  Next, in S2109, whether or not the starting round is the V round (second round), that is, starting is to open the second big prize opening 35 (also referred to as “V attacker”) having the specific area 39 inside. It is determined whether the round is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated (the game area is allowed to pass through the specific area 39) (S2109). In this embodiment, the second round is set to the V round for operating the movable piece 150. Further, a round (V round) that opens the second grand prize opening 35 having the specific area 39 inside and operates the movable piece 150 is also referred to as “specific round” or “specific round game”. The “specific round” or “specific round game” in the jackpot game related to the planned passing jackpot is also referred to as the “first specified round” or “first specified round game”. "Or" specific round game "is also referred to as" second specific round "or" second specific round game ". Further, a round in which the second grand prize opening 35 having the specific area 39 inside is opened and the movable piece 150 is not operated is also referred to as “non-specific round” or “non-specific round game” and is scheduled to pass V. “Non-specific round” or “non-specific round game” in jackpot game related to jackpot is also referred to as “first non-specific round” or “first non-specific round game”. The “non-specific round” or “non-specific round game” is also referred to as “second non-specific round game” or “second non-specific round game”. In addition, a round in which the first big prize opening 30 that does not have a specific area or movable piece inside is also referred to as a “normal round” or “normal round game”.

  If it is determined in S2109 that the starting round is not the V round (the second round), that is, the first round or the third round or later (NO in S2109), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2109 that the starting round is the V round (second round) (YES in S2109), the effective period of the specific area is set based on a predetermined specific area effective pattern (S2110). At the same time, the opening / closing operation of the specific region is started based on the predetermined specific region opening / closing operation pattern (S2111), and the processing is ended.

  Here, the specific area effective pattern is as shown in the timing chart of “handling of specific area” in the timing chart of FIG. 50, and is switched between valid and invalid at a predetermined timing shown in FIG. Similarly, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is as shown in the timing chart of “specific area” in the timing chart of FIG. 50, and the movable piece 150 is operated to open (specific area at a predetermined timing shown in FIG. 50. 39 is in a state where it can pass through 39) or closed (a state where it cannot pass through the specific region 39).

  The specific area opening / closing operation pattern starts at the start of the V round (at the first release), and ends at the timing when the V round ends and the interval period (2000 ms) set after the V round ends. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). Although the details will be described later, only one specific region opening / closing operation pattern is set in this embodiment, starting from a closing period of 80 ms, and then setting an opening period of 80 ms, and thereafter with a predetermined pattern. An open period or a closed period is set. Further, although only one specific area opening / closing operation pattern is set, the end timing of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern differs depending on the big hit game (V round to be executed). It becomes a specific area opening / closing operation pattern. Specifically, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 51 and the specific area opening / closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 52 are different.

  If it is determined in S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2112. Here, as a case where it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the round, during the interval period after the end of the round, or during the special prize closing process described later be able to. In S2112, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening / closing operation is in progress, that is, whether or not the predetermined opening pattern started in S2108 is being executed (during round) (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the winning prize opening / closing operation is being executed (during a round) (YES in S2112), it is then determined whether or not the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2113).

  Here, as a round end condition of the present embodiment, (1) a round execution time (for example, 29 s) set for a running round has elapsed (or an open pattern set for a running round is ended) (2) In the running round, two conditions are established: a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls entered in the running round. When either one of the conditions is satisfied, the round end condition is satisfied based on the previously satisfied condition. If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2113), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2113), a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2114), and the process proceeds to S2115. In S2114, a round end command capable of specifying a round to be ended is set, such as “1R end command” for the end of the first round and “2R end command” for the end of the second round. . The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201.

  If it is determined in S2112 that the prize winning opening / closing operation is not being performed (NO in S2112), the process proceeds to S2115. In S2115, a special winning opening closing process, which will be described later, is performed (S2115), and then it is determined whether or not the special winning opening closing process is completed (S2116). Here, in the special winning opening closing process, mainly the interval period setting process, the match number determination process in the chance round (the first round and the second round), the retry process when it is determined that there is a mismatch, error When the notification process or the like is executed and these processes are finished, it is determined that the special winning opening closing process is finished. Further, the closing process flag is set to ON during execution of the special winning opening closing process, and when the winning prize closing process is completed (completed), the closing process flag is turned OFF. Accordingly, the determination as to whether or not the big prize closing process has ended is made based on whether the closing process flag is ON or OFF. Here, each of the interval period setting process, the winning / exiting number coincidence determination process, the retry process, and the error notification process that can be executed in the big prize closing process is also referred to as a “confirmation process”. Is generally referred to as confirmation processing.

  If it is determined in S2116 that the winning prize closing process has not ended (the closing process flag is ON) (NO in S2116), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2116 that the big prize closing process has been completed (the closing process flag is OFF) (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and the value of the round counter is “0”. Is determined (S2118). If it is determined in S2118 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2118), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2118), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2119), and the jackpot ending period is started. (S2120), the big hit end flag is set to ON (S2121), and the process ends. Note that the value of the round counter becomes “0” when all rounds in the jackpot to be executed are completed.

  Here, in the jackpot end process in S2119, the process of setting the ending command is performed, the ending command to be set is a gaming state at the time of the jackpot from a plurality of ending commands, jackpot type information, and Based on the specific area non-passing (specific area non-passing) information (V flag is ON or OFF), any ending command is selected and set. The ending period to be executed (set) varies depending on which ending command is set. Here, the ending period is after the completion of all opening operations of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 and second big prize opening 35) in the big hit game, and the special symbol (direction design) is displayed in a variable manner. Is a period that is set before the execution of the process, and is also referred to as an “end period”. During this ending period (end period), the special winning opening is closed. In addition, the opening period is a period that is set before the first opening operation of the big winning opening in the jackpot game is started, and after the change display of the special symbol (direction symbol) is disabled. " The effect executed during the “start period” is also referred to as “start effect (opening effect)”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 65, when the gaming state is low probability time short (low probability low base state), as a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, the big hit type is 15R first big hit, 7R fourth big hit Or 15R sixth jackpot, and if the V flag is ON, that is, if the big hit game is in a high probability state (highly accurate base state), an ending period of 17000 ms (first ending period) Set the ending command to execute. On the other hand, as a result of the special symbol win / loss determination, if the big hit type is 15R first big hit, 7R fourth big hit, or 15R sixth big hit, and the V flag is OFF, that is, the time after the big hit game is low (low In the case of an accurate base state, an ending command for executing an 8000 ms ending period (second ending period) is set.

  As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, if the big hit type is 15R 1 big hit, 7R 4 big hit, or 15R 6 big hit, if it passes through a specific area, it will be in a high probability state after big hit game (probability variation mode) in the ending period When the effect (first specific effect) indicating to the player to shift to is executed and the specific area has not passed (passed through the non-specific area), the transition to the time-short state (time-short mode) is made during the ending period. This is because an effect (second specific effect) indicating that the player is in a low probability state (or is not indicated to the player in a high probability state) is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the first specific effect that indicates to the player to shift to the high probability state is a relatively long time effect, and indicates to the player to shift to the short time state (high probability state). The second specific effect (which is not shown to the player) is a relatively short time effect. In this way, in this embodiment, since it is necessary to execute ending periods of different lengths according to the result of passing through the specific area in the V round (whether the V flag is ON or OFF), depending on the result of passing through the specific area Different ending periods can be set. Thereby, the sub-control unit that has received the ending command can execute the ending effects of different effect modes and effect periods according to the ending period (according to the gaming state after the big hit game). Here, in the V round (in the big hit game), the information indicating the specific area passing result indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area is also referred to as “specific area information”. The specific area information includes information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area in the V round and information indicating that the game ball has not passed the specific area in the V round, and determines the ending period. The ending period determining means (ending period determining means) can determine the ending period based on the specific area information.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a low probability short time (low probability low base state) and the big hit type is 12R second big hit or 12R third big hit, whether the V flag is ON or OFF The ending command for executing a common 8000 ms ending period (third ending period) is set. This is because, as a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, when the big hit type is 12R second big hit and 12R third big hit, the effect mode (effect mode) after the big hit game is ended is determined as the special symbol success / failure determination. This is due to a probability non-notification state (also simply referred to as “non-notification mode”) in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability (big hit probability) is high or low. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to these jackpots, the “showing entering the non-notification mode” effect (third specific effect) is performed regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not passed. The ending period to be set is not changed according to the region passing result. Here, in the present embodiment, the second ending period and the third ending period are the same length period, but instead, the first ending period and the third ending period are set to the same length period. May be. Here, the non-notification mode may be a high probability or a low probability, that is, there is a possibility of a high probability by not informing the player of the probability of success / failure determination (recognition is difficult). It is an effect showing that. Here, as a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, the third specific effect executed in the ending period when the jackpot type is 12R second jackpot and 12R third jackpot is also referred to as “first non-notification mode transition effect”. This is different from the sixth specific effect (second non-notification mode transition effect) and the seventh specific effect (third non-notification mode transition effect) which will be described later. These have different possibilities (expectations) of high probability, and the high probability expectation in the present embodiment is the second non-notification mode transition effect> first non-notification mode transition effect> third non-notification. The order of the notification mode transition effect is set.

  In addition, when the gaming state has no low probability time base (low probability low base state), when the big hit type is 7R fifth big hit, and the gaming state has low probability short time (low probability high base state) or high probability short time When there is a high-accuracy high-base state, whether the V flag is ON or OFF (whether it passes through a specific area or not), a common ending period of 5000 ms (fourth ending) Ending command to execute (period) is set. This is because in the case of the 7R fifth big hit, the effect mode (effect mode) after the big hit game is ended is the “normal mode” which is the initial mode executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the ending effect that is executed during the ending period related to the jackpot, regardless of passing or non-passing of the specific area, the effect of “transition to the normal mode” (fourth specific effect) is performed. The ending period to be set is not changed. “Normal mode” is a performance mode that shows a low probability and low base state in principle, but with this, even if it is set to “normal mode” after the big hit game ends, it is highly probable (although it is unlikely) There may be a base state. However, since the 7R fifth big hit is a “special area unscheduled big hit”, it is very difficult for a game ball to pass through the specific area during the big hit game. The fourth ending period is shorter than the first to third ending periods. The low probability low base state is the most unfavorable gaming state set after a big hit game, so if a time for notifying the transition to such a gaming state is provided for a long time, the player's willingness to play May be reduced. In particular, when such a result (7R 5th big hit) is obtained in the high and low base state or the low and low base state, the trend shifts from the advantageous state to the unfavorable state (normal state). It is. For this reason, a short-term ending period is set and the game is advanced promptly.

  In addition, when the gaming state has a low probability short time (low probability high base state) or a high probability short time (high probability high base state), the ending period (8000 ms, 6000 ms and 3900 ms) are defined (see FIG. 48), and the set ending command (the ending period to be executed) is not changed by the specific area passing information (V flag ON / OFF). Specifically, in the case of 15R 6 big hits in the high base state, an ending period of 8000 ms in order to perform the “high probability state (probability variation mode) effect” (the fifth specific effect) in the ending period. (5th ending period). It should be noted that the reason for not setting 17000 ms is that the big hit in the high base state is the big hit after the second time (in the so-called consecutive resort), so that the game progress in the consecutive resort is quicker than the first hit. Shorter time setting. In the high base state, when the 2R seventh big hit is made, the effect mode after the big hit game is ended is set to the “non-notification mode”. In the ending period, an ending period of 6000 ms is used to perform the “indicating entering the non-notification mode” effect (sixth specific effect, second non-notification mode transition effect) regardless of whether or not the specific area passes. (Sixth ending period) is set. In the high base state, when the 2R eighth big hit is made, the effect mode after the big hit game is ended is set to the “non-notification mode”. And in the ending period, an ending period of 3900 ms is used for performing the “indicating entering the non-notification mode” effect (seventh specific effect, third non-notification mode transition effect) regardless of whether the specific area has passed or not passed. (Seventh ending period) is set.

  Since the 2R seventh big hit is a “V pass expected big hit”, if the game is played in the normal manner (as instructed), the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state. Since the eighth big hit is a “V non-passing planned big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the time-short state. Therefore, in the ending period, the player performs the game with a high sense of expectation when the second non-notification mode transition effect is executed than when the third non-notification mode transition effect is executed. It becomes possible. Also, in the high base state, when 15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 12R third big hit, or 7R fourth big hit, it becomes the case where 15R sixth big hit is made in the high base state described above. Since the same ending period is set, the description is omitted. In addition, in the case of 2R seventh big hit in the low base time (low probability low base state), the same ending period as in the case of 2R seventh big hit in the high base state described above is set. Is omitted. In addition, in the case of 2R 8 big hit in the low base time (low probability low base state), since it is set to the same ending period as in the case of 2R 8 big hit in the high base state described above, Is omitted. In addition, the 2R eighth big hit is “V non-passing planned big hit (also referred to as“ V non-passing planned big hit ”)”, and the high probability state is assumed to end with this big hit. Therefore, as described above, since it is preferable that the period for notifying the entry into such an unfavorable period is a short period, the shortest period (3900 ms) is set. Moreover, the following reason can be given as one of the reasons for not changing the ending period based on the specific area information during the time reduction. In other words, the jackpot during the shortage is a jackpot for the second and subsequent times (so-called consecutive resorts), so that the player gets used to the game, and the game progresses as scheduled for the “V-passing jackpot” or “V-passing jackpot”. Since the possibility is very high, the ending period should not be changed based on the specific area information.

  If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2105), it is determined whether the execution time of the big hit ending effect has elapsed since the last round in the big hit game has ended ( If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the big hit end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Next, the big hit flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation process (FIG. 20).

  Here, in the specific area effective period setting process (S2110), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is effective during the V round, that is, the predetermined period after the opening of the second big prize opening 35 in the second round ( It is set to a period (also referred to as “effective period” or “first period”) to be determined as (privilege grant). The period other than the valid period is set to a period (also referred to as “invalid period” or “second period”) for determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid (privilege not given). The effective period of the specific area 39 includes the execution mode of the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round and the opening pattern of the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) ( And an execution mode of the movable piece opening / closing operation pattern).

  Specifically, the period in which the passage of the specific area is valid, that is, the period in which the gaming state after the big hit game is in a high probability state by the passing of the game ball through the specific area (period in which the privilege is granted) is 51 to 52 as shown in FIG. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of the second round of 2R eighth big hit, 7R fifth big hit, and 12R third big hit, that is, V round (the second big prize opening 35 is opened). The 2R eighth big hit, the 7R fifth big hit, and the 12R third big hit are “V non-passing planned big hits” during which the game ball is not scheduled to pass the specific area 39 during the big hit game. Therefore, the short opening opening pattern (second opening pattern) having a short opening time is selected as the opening pattern of the special winning opening (V attacker opening pattern) in the V round.

  Along with this, a specific area opening / closing pattern is executed, and a specific area effective period setting process is executed. First, when the V attacker opens, the V round (second round) starts and the specific area opening / closing operation pattern starts. As shown in FIG. 51, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern starts from the closed state. After 80 ms has passed in the closed state, it changes to the open state (the movable piece 150 operates and changes from (a) to (b) in FIG. 47), and after 80 ms has passed in the open state (after 160 ms has passed as a whole). In the closed state. On the other hand, in this short-opening opening pattern, the V attacker is closed only after 100 ms is opened, and the V round (second round) is completed. Then, an interval period of 2000 ms is set. The specific area opening / closing operation pattern is supposed to end at the end of the interval period (2000 ms) of the V round. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, after the opening of 80 ms is finished, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is finished through a closing state of 1940 ms. As a result, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is terminated without executing the opening operation of 26000 ms at maximum thereafter (see FIG. 50).

  On the other hand, the valid period of the specific area is started after the start of the V round and at the timing when the specific area is first opened. That is, 80 ms in the closed state after the start of the V round and before the specific area is opened (before the movable piece starts operating) is set as an invalid period. Thereafter, during the execution of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, the period during which the specific area is opened is set as the effective period. However, the invalid period is set during the retry operation. In addition to this, when the specific area is switched from the open state to the closed state, the period of 900 ms (this period is also referred to as “extra period”) after the closed state is maintained as the effective period. This is because when the movable piece 150 is closed, the specific area 39 enters the specific area 39 just before the specific area 39 is closed, and the specific game sensor is actually detected by the specific area sensor 39a. This is because there is a possibility that the area will be closed. For this reason, in this embodiment, when switching from the open state to the closed state, whether the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is being executed or after the completion, it is effective for a certain period after the closed state. The period. In FIG. 51, after the valid period (extra period) of 900 ms elapses, there is no period during which the specific area is in an open state (except for the execution period of the retry operation).

  Next, referring to FIG. 52, the second round of 15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 15R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big win, that is, V round (second big prize opening 35) The specific area effective period setting process will be described with reference to a timing chart of (Opening). The 15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 15R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big hit are planned to pass the specific area 39 during the big hit game. Planned jackpot ". Therefore, the long open release pattern (first open pattern) having a long open time is selected as the open pattern of the big prize opening in the V round (the open pattern of the V attacker).

  Along with this, a specific area opening / closing pattern is executed, and a specific area effective period setting process is executed. In the same manner as described above, when the V attacker (second grand prize opening 35) is opened, the V round (second round) starts and the specific area opening / closing operation pattern starts. The open pattern of the long opening shown in FIG. 52 is different from the short opening in that the V attacker is opened for 16000 ms to be in the closed state. Then, all of the long release patterns set for the V round (second round) such as the 15R first big hit described above are executed, or the V round (second round) is defined in the V round. The V round (2 rounds) is completed when any of the end conditions of the number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of the game balls entering is satisfied. On the other hand, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is 2 unless a specified number of game balls enter during 840 ms (that is, 1000 ms after starting the big hit game) after the first open state (80 ms) has elapsed. The second open state (maximum 26000 ms) is executed. It should be noted that since the launching speed of the game balls is about 1 per 600 ms, it is practically impossible to enter 10 game balls in 1000 ms.

  Thus, in the specific area effective period setting process, after the first open state (80 ms) of the specific area 39 is completed, the extra period is maintained as the 900 ms effective period, and then the invalid state is set. Then, after 1940 ms after the invalid state, the valid period is set in accordance with the specific region 39 being in the second open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 52, the specific area opening / closing operation pattern ends when the V round ends and the interval period (2000 ms) related to the V round ends. Since the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is closed at the same time as the end, in the specific area effective period setting process, an extra period of 900 ms is provided as an effective period after becoming the closed state, and then switched to the invalid period. .

  Here, at a timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned on (that is, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the effective period), the game state display 46 is displayed in a predetermined manner. As a mode, it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is in a high probability state. Specifically, the game state display 46 is composed of three LEDs “a1a2a3”. In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). In addition, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a in the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of “a1 • a2 • a3 •” is set. When the big hit game ends and the gaming state is set to a high probability state, the display mode is “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □”. In addition, the lighting control timing of the game state indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, the display mode of “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” is maintained even if the game ball passes a specific area. , “A1a2a3” may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the big hit game, and “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

  That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (passing of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and outside the V effective period (V ineffective The V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected during the period. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (a gaming state setting process (FIG. 35) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to an illegal act, that is, it is not illegally set to a high probability state.

[Large prize closing process]
Next, the special winning opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process”) will be described with reference to FIG. The big prize opening closing process (S2115) is a process to be performed at the end of each round in the special electric accessory process (big hit game). In the winning prize closing process (S2115), it is first determined whether or not the closing process flag is ON (S2701). If it is determined that the closing process flag is not ON (NO in S2701), the closing process flag is turned ON (S2702). The interval period is started (S2703), and the process proceeds to S2704. As a result, the closing process flag indicating that the closing process is being executed is turned ON, and measurement of an interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) set after the round is started. The interval period is set according to the round to be finished.

  Specifically, when the round to be ended is the first round or the second round, 2000 ms is set as the interval period, and when the round to be ended is after the third round, 200 ms is set as the interval period. Further, the closing process flag is turned OFF when the special winning opening closing process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2701 that the closing process flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the big prize opening closing process is being executed (YES in S2701), the process directly proceeds to S2704.

  In S2704, it is determined whether the interval period has ended (S2704). If it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is being measured (NO in S2704), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S2704), it is then determined whether the end is the first round (S2705). If it is determined that the first round has been completed (YES in S2705), an input / output number match determination process described later is executed (S2708), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2705 that it is not the first round (NO in S2705), it is then determined whether it is the second round, that is, the V round (S2706). If it is determined in S2706 that the second round is completed (YES in S2706), the specific area opening / closing operation is terminated (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2708.

  Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the specific region 39 in the V round (opening / closing operation of the movable piece 150) is completed. That is, the specific area opening / closing operation that is started together with the start of the V round ends with the end of the interval period related to the V round after the end of the V round. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2706 that the end is not the second round, that is, it is determined that the end is the third and subsequent rounds (NO in S2706), the closing process flag is turned OFF (S2709), and the process is performed. Finish. In other words, after the third round, as long as the interval period (200 ms) set after the end of the round ends, the closing process flag is turned off as it is, and the big prize closing process ends. In other words, in the winning prize closing process after the third round, the winning / exiting number coincidence determination process and the specific area opening / closing operation end process are not executed.

  In S2708, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (second grand prize opening 35) during the round matches the number of game balls that have been entered through the big prize opening. An input / output number match determination process is performed (S2708), and the process ends. Also, the winning / ejecting number coincidence determination process (S2708) is a round that is executed before the V round, and is a round (non-specific round) that opens the same V attacker (second big prize opening 35) as the V round. ) And the second round that is the V round (specific round), and the subsequent rounds (the third and subsequent rounds) are those that release the V attacker. But it is not done. In the V round, since the movable piece for opening and closing the specific area 39 in the V attacker is operated, there is a possibility that the game ball is clogged in the attacker due to the game ball biting into the movable piece. Therefore, the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged are managed to check whether there is any clogging. In addition, when passing a specific area by a fraudulent act such as so-called fishing line goto, the number of balls entered and the number of discharges do not match, so it is possible to detect fraud and prevent unexpected damage from occurring. It is also possible.

  Also, the deposit / discharge number matching process is executed in the first round in order to confirm whether or not there is a ball clogging before the first V round executed in the big hit game. If the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged coincide with each other at the end of the first round, the second round V can be started in a state where it is confirmed that there is no ball clogging. In addition, if the number of balls entered and the number of discharged balls do not match at the end of one round, a retry process (also referred to as “movable member operation process”) described later and error notification are performed before the start of the V round. It is also possible to eliminate clogging of balls. In this way, the V-round can be normally executed by performing the input / output number coincidence determination process in the first round and the second round. In addition, in the rounds after the V round that is executed last in the big hit game, that is, the rounds after the third round (after the end of the V round), the input / output number matching determination process is not performed, and the interval period Also, it is possible to set a short period (200 ms) and execute a big hit game quickly.

[I / O number match judgment processing]
Next, the input / output number match determination process (S2708) will be described with reference to FIG. In the winning / ejecting number match determination process (S2708), first, in a predetermined round, the number of game balls (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls ( It is determined whether or not (the number of discharges) matches (S2801). This winning / ejecting number matching determination process (also referred to as “matching determination process”) is performed only in the first prize winning round closing process in the second round. In both the first and second rounds, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened and closed with a predetermined opening pattern. For this reason, during the applicable round (1 round or 2 rounds), the number of balls entered the second grand prize opening 35 and the number discharged from the second big prize opening 35 (second big prize device 36) are: It is determined whether or not they match.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the second grand prize winning device 36. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 35 all pass through a predetermined game ball guiding passage in the second big prize winning device, and then all the second big prize opening sensors 35a ("entrance detection means" and "entrance ball"). Pass the detection sensor). That is, the second grand prize opening sensor 35a is a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the second big prize opening 35, and based on the detection by the second big prize opening sensor 35a. The number of balls entering the mouth 35 can be counted. When a game ball is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 35a, the number of balls entered is counted and stored by a number-of-balls counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80.

  In addition, the game ball detected by (passed through) the second grand prize opening sensor 35a is always passed through a predetermined game ball guiding path, and either the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a Pass through. That is, both the specific area sensor 39a (also referred to as “second discharge detection means” and “second discharge detection sensor”) and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a (“first discharge detection means” and “first discharge detection sensor”). Is a sensor for detecting the discharge of the game ball from the second big prize opening 35, and is discharged from the second big prize opening 35 based on the detection of the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. The number can be counted. When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a, the discharge number is counted and stored by a discharge number counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Further, the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a that detect that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening is discharged are also collectively referred to as “discharge detection means” or “discharge detection sensor”.

  In this embodiment, the number of entering balls and the number of discharging counters are provided and the number of entering balls and the number of discharged balls are separately counted. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It is good also as an aspect which provides an in-and-out number counting means and increases / decreases a count value whenever there exists a ball | bowl and discharge | emission. In such an embodiment, the initial value is “0”, and when the count value is “1”, it indicates that the number of entered balls is 1 more than the number of discharged balls. It indicates that the number is one more than the number, and in the case of “0”, it is possible to match the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged.

  In addition, a movable piece 150 (also referred to as a “movable member”) is provided inside the second grand prize opening 35. When the movable piece 150 is in a closed state, the second big prize opening sensor 35a is connected. The passed game ball is guided to the non-specific area side, passes through the non-specific area sensor 49a, and is discharged out of the second grand prize winning device (see FIG. 47A). On the other hand, when the movable piece 150 is in the open state, the game ball that has passed through the second grand prize opening sensor 35a is guided to the specific area side, passes through the specific area sensor 39a, and goes out of the second big prize winning device. It will be discharged (see FIG. 47 (b)).

  In S2801, the count value of the number-of-entries counting means described above is compared with the count value of the number-of-discharge counting means, and whether the count values match, Are determined to match. Next, if it is determined in S2802 that the number of balls entered and the number of discharges match (YES in S2802), it is determined whether error notification is being executed (S2803). If it is determined in S2803 that the error notification is not being executed (NO in S2803), the closing process flag is turned OFF (S2804), and the process ends. That is, if the number of winning / discharging matches and the error notification is not being executed, the corresponding round winning prize closing process is completed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the error notification is being executed (YES in S2803), the error notification is terminated (S2805), the closing process flag is turned OFF (S2804), and the process is terminated. This is because the matching determination is performed again during execution of an error notification (S2809) to be described later, and when it is determined that they match, the error notification being executed is terminated halfway and then the closing process flag is turned OFF. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the error notification from being unnecessarily continued for a long time even though the abnormality has been resolved.

  If it is determined in S2802 that the number of entered balls and the number of discharged balls do not match (NO in S2802), it is then determined whether it is time to execute a retry operation (S2806). In the present embodiment, as shown in the V-round reference timing chart shown in FIG. 50, the coincidence determination of the number of incoming and outgoing is performed from t1 (2100 ms from the start of the round) to t2 (29000 ms from the start of the round) according to the end timing of the V round. It is executed at any timing within the range. Then, if it is determined that there is a mismatch in the match determination, a retry operation of 300 ms is executed after a further 1500 ms has elapsed from the execution timing of the match determination. Then, after 900 ms elapses after the retry operation is completed, error notification of 10000 ms is executed, and then error notification is ended, and the big prize closing process is ended (completed), and the process proceeds to the next round.

  If it is determined in S2806 that it is not the execution time (start time) of the retry operation (NO in S2806), it is then determined whether it is the execution time (start time) of error notification (S2808). If it is determined in S2808 that it is not an error notification execution time (NO in S2808), it is determined whether it is an error notification end time (S2810). If it is determined in S2810 that it is not the time to end the error notification (NO in S2810), the process ends. For example, if this is a period before the retry operation is started (a period of 900 ms + 600 ms) after it has been determined that the above-mentioned mismatch does not occur, when the input / output number match determination process is performed again, If it is determined that there is a match, the process proceeds to S2803. If it is determined that there is no match again, it is determined again whether or not it is time to execute the retry operation. The same applies hereinafter.

  In this way, since the input / output number match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined interrupt cycle, the first input / output number match determination is executed at the end of the interval period of the chance round (1 round and 2 rounds). In the period until the retry operation is executed, the determination of the coincidence of the number of inputs / outputs is performed a plurality of times including the first determination. And if it determines with a coincidence in the input / discharge number coincidence determination after the second time, the subsequent process (retry operation or error notification) is not executed, the closing process flag is turned off, and the process ends. Also, the end of the interval period coincides with the end of the specific area opening / closing pattern. If the state when the specific area opening / closing pattern is ended is the open state, the specific area opening / closing pattern is ended. An extra period of 900 ms is provided after the closed state.

  As described above, the extra period is treated as an effective passage through the specific area 39. In other words, this extra period may be set after the first input / discharge number match determination (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 52), the first input / discharge number match determination is determined to be inconsistent. When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the extra period, it is determined that there is a mismatch in the input / output number match determination despite the fact that the game is normally normal. Even in such a case, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to execute the coincidence of the number of inputs / discharges a plurality of times before executing the retry operation, it is the same in the determination of the coincidence of the number of inputs / discharges after the second time before the retry operation is performed It is possible to finish the special winning opening closing process without performing the retry operation or error notification. Further, in this embodiment, since the number of coincidence determinations of the plurality of times are executed even during the extra period of 900 ms, it is more reliable when the game ball passes through the specific area or the non-specific area during the extra period. In addition, it is possible to quickly end the special winning opening closing process without performing unnecessary processing (retry operation or error notification).

  Further, in the present embodiment, because of the interrupt cycle, the input / output number coincidence determination is also executed after the extra period and before the retry operation is started (600 ms). In a state where the game balls are reliably reflected, it is possible to reliably execute the input / output number coincidence determination process before performing the retry operation or error notification. In addition, if it is determined that there is a mismatch in the number of deposits / discharges in the extra period or the subsequent 600 ms period, there is a possibility that a ball clogging or the like has occurred. Perform the retry operation to be activated. The retry operation pattern is preferably different from the specific area opening / closing operation pattern. In the present embodiment, due to the interrupt cycle, it is possible to execute the number of coincidence determinations multiple times during the period (900 ms) before the error notification execution after the retry operation is completed. When the ball clogging or the like is resolved, it is determined that the number of coins is the same by determining the number of deposits / discharges before notifying the error, and it is possible to complete the big prize closing process without notifying the error. In addition, since it is possible to execute the coincidence of the number of deposits / discharges multiple times during the execution of the error notification, it is possible to terminate the error notification at the timing when it is determined to match and complete the big prize closing process. Become. This makes it possible to provide game control that does not cause unnecessary anxiety to the player without executing unnecessary error processing. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the gaming interests from deteriorating.

  Further, in this embodiment, if it is not determined that the input / discharge number coincidence determination is the same even after the error notification execution period has elapsed, the end of the predetermined error notification period (10000 ms in the present embodiment) ends. The winning-port closing process has been completed, and the transition to the next round is possible. The game store side can check the gaming machine and take some measures during the error notification of 10000 ms, and can deal with it so that the normal game can be continued. Also, there is no ball clogging, etc., and due to the occurrence of noise etc., it may be determined that the number of incoming / outgoing matches does not match. It is possible to cancel the error and resume the game quickly.

  If it is determined in S2806 that it is the execution time (start time) of the retry operation (YES in S2806), the retry operation is executed (S2807), and the process ends. If it is determined in S2808 that it is time to execute error notification (YES in S2808), error notification is executed (S2809), and the process ends. If it is determined that it is time to end the error notification (YES in S2810), the error notification is ended (S2811), the closing process flag is turned OFF (S2812), and the process is ended. By turning off the closing process flag, it is possible to indicate that the special winning opening closing process has been completed.

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the game state setting process (S2121), it is first determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in a specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later. If it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), “10000” is set in the probability variation counter (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). Then, the hour / hour flag is turned ON (S2205), “10000” is set in the hour / hour counter (S2206), and the processing is completed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to a high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this gaming state setting process. ing.

  Here, when the V flag is ON, the number of times set in the probability variation counter is the number of times that the special symbol success / failure determination with high probability can be executed. The value of “10000” times is substantially the next big hit, considering the big hit probability in the high probability state, the business hours of the game shop for the day, and the number of special symbol success / failure determinations that can be executed within the business hours. This is the same as guaranteeing a high probability state until it occurs or until the end of business hours. Therefore, when the V flag is turned on and set to the high probability state, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (substantially synonymous). In addition, when the probability variation flag is ON, “10000” times is similarly set in the hour / hour counter, so that both the hour / short state (open extended state) is set while this high probability state is set. It can be said. As in the present embodiment, the value of “10000” times may be set to the probability variation counter and the hourly time counter to substantially set the high accuracy base state until the next time, or the V flag is turned on. In this case, it is also possible to employ a control that sets the high-accuracy base state until the next big hit occurs without setting a value in the counter.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the 7R fifth big hit ends without turning on the probability variation flag (S2207). In step S2207, the 7R fifth big hit is not completed, that is, the other big hits shown in FIG. 6 (15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 12R third big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 15R sixth big hit, 2R second big hit When it is determined that either 7 big hits or 2R 8 big hits (NO in S2207), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (S2208), the hour / hour counter is set to “100” (S2209), and the process is completed. . Thereby, the gaming state after the current big hit game becomes a low probability state, a short time state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). This low-accuracy base state is terminated when one of the following conditions is met: special symbol variation display is performed 100 times (special symbol success / failure determination is performed 100 times) and the next big hit occurs. To do. In addition, the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the number of times of adding the number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol. In this way, even if it is a “V passing expected big hit” such as the 15R first big hit, if there is no passing through a specific area during the V round for some reason such as no game ball being fired, a high probability state is set. Without being set, the time-short state (low-accuracy base state) is entered.

  If it is determined in S2207 that the end is the 7R fifth big hit (YES in S2207), the process ends without turning on the probability variation flag and without turning on the time reduction flag. That is, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit and the V flag is OFF (specific area not passed (also referred to as “specific area non-passed”)), the gaming state after the big hit game is a low probability state and The low base state (low probability low base state) is set.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S207) subsequent to the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 36, it is first determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined in S2401 that there is no detection by the specific area sensor 39a (NO in S2401), the process ends. If it is determined in S2401 that there is detection by the specific area sensor 39a (YES in S2401), it is determined whether the specific area is valid (S2402). The specific area effective period is a period set in the specific area effective period setting process (S2110) in the special electric accessory process (FIG. 32). The specific area valid period is set to the second round (V round) in the jackpot game.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the specific area (specific area sensor) is in the valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and a specific area passing command is set (S2404). Finish the process. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this specific area passing command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control board 90 produces the effect symbol based on the received specific area passing command. A predetermined game effect is executed in the display area or the like.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the specific area (specific area sensor) is not in the valid period (invalid period) (NO in S2402), the invalid period passing command is set without turning on the V flag ( S2405), and the process ends. When there is a passage through the specific area during the invalid period, a predetermined error display may be performed by a display or the like that can be controlled by the main control unit. Further, the CPU of the main control board 80 transmits the invalid period passing command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control board 90, based on the received invalid period passing command, A predetermined error notification may be performed using the image display device 7, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the speaker 67, and the like.

[Processing at start-up]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start and entry process (S208) following the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 37, in the starting ball entry process (S208), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S2502). If it is determined in S2502 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. In S2503, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S2503). Next, in S2504, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, according to the current gaming state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (random number value for special symbol success / failure determination) obtained at the time of entering the starting gate And determine whether it is a big hit or missed. When the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-determination (so-called “holding”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not it is a big hit) is performed prior to the determination (S1303, S1309) in the special figure 2 determination process (S1202) described later. Is equivalent to “look-ahead”).

  Note that the prior determination is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, and a normal state if it is a normal state (low probability state). Based on the jackpot determination table, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value matches. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination and the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not a big hit type, a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed, or the like.

  Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the second special symbol read out in S2501 and the information determined in advance in S2504 (pre-determined information) is generated as a special figure 2 start entering command. Then, it is set in an output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S2503 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information, etc.) may be transmitted.

  Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, whether or not it is information related to the big hit, the number of held balls of the second special symbol, Can be identified by the sub-control unit 90. In addition, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entering command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number is a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the obtained random number values read out in S2503, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random value) and information indicating the result of the pre-determination is generated and set as the special figure 2 start ball entering command. It is possible.

  Next, in S2506, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S2506). If it is determined in S2506 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2506 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends.

  In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S2507). When it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2507 that the time reduction flag is OFF, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the pre-determination process after S2508. Here, when the time reduction flag is ON, that is, when the current gaming state is a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is activated, and whether or not the special figure 2 is successful or not. The determination (see FIG. 8B) is easily performed. In the first embodiment, as described later, the special figure 2 reserved digest (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the special figure 1 reserved digest (variable display of the first special symbol). (So-called special figure 2 priority variation machine). In such a configuration, for example, when the preliminary determination of FIG. 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and when it is clearly shown that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, Using the priority of Special Figure 2 Reservation, intentionally remove Special Figure 2 suspension at any time (set it to “0”) and intend to win the big hits related to Special Figure 1 that shows the result of prior judgment Technical interventions such as automatic generation are possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game that the player can adjust such a big hit occurrence timing. For this reason, when the current gaming state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing is terminated without performing the processing related to the prior determination in FIG. 1 after S2508.

  The processing of S2508 to S2510 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S2508), Preliminary determination is made on the read acquired random number value (S2509), and game information including at least the reserved ball number data relating to the first special symbol read in S2501 and information (preliminary determination information) determined in advance in S2509, As shown in FIG. 1, it is generated as a start entry command and set in an output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). The prior determination (holding prefetching) in S2509 is performed prior to the determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 determination process (S1207) described later.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S209) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine state (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, and the number of remaining fluctuations of probability / short time Etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then the loop process is performed without returning to the interrupt process (FIG. 11).

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The effect determining random numbers include a notice effect determining random number for determining the notice effect and an effect design determining random number for determining the effect symbol. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Random values may not be added one by one at the time of update, but may be added two by two. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been received is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of variation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a later-described variation effect pattern is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. A production (production design game production, special game production related to jackpot game, etc.) is executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member Control, audio output control from a speaker, and the like can be performed.

[Reception interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not an input has been made (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). . Subsequently, a ramp data output process for outputting the ramp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). Next, drive data output processing for outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source) is performed (S4203). This drive data is also created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interruption process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4301) and a specific effect start process (S4302) described later are performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the received command analysis process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not a start ball entering command is received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and it is determined that no start ball entering command is received. If it is determined (NO in S4395), the process proceeds to S4401, and if it is determined that the start ball entering command is received (YES in S4395), the production hold information storage process (S4400) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4401. . The production hold information storage process (S4400) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start entry command (Special Figure 1 start entry command or Special Figure 2 start entry command) received in S4395. (Game information such as numerical value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure holding balls at the time of sending and receiving the start incoming ball command (at the time of command generation) In the shift memory format, it is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, if the received start pitch command is a special Fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of held balls "4" in Fig. 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special map 1 start pitch command Are stored as special figure 1 production hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the production hold information storage area (production hold information) in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is consistent with the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  In S4401, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), a variation effect start process (S4402) described later is performed. If it is determined that the change start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4406 without performing the change effect start process. In S4406, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4406), the effect design is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process to be ended is performed (S4407). In the variation effect end process (S4407), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the effect pattern 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is stopped and the variation effect (the effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4406 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4406), the process proceeds to S4408 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4408, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4408). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (YES in S4408), during a special game (big hit game) A special game effect selection process for selecting a special game effect pattern (effect mode) to be executed is performed (S4409). For special game production, at least the opening production performed during the opening period before the special prize opening opening (before the first round) at the start of the special game, and the round game during the special game (during the big hit game) Round effect (big hit game effect) that is executed in accordance with the progress of the entrance game). In the first embodiment, an opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the length of the opening period (opening time) is specified by the opening command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, when the big hit type is 7R fourth big hit and 7R fifth big hit, the opening time is 1900 ms (1.9 seconds), and the other big hit is 8000 ms (8 seconds). It has become. The reason why the opening times of the 7R 4th big hit and the 7R 5th big hit are shorter than the other big hits is to perform the "VS chance effect" described later in the case of the 7R 4th big hit and the 7R 5th big hit, This is because the “VS chance effect” does not clearly notify the player of the occurrence of the big hit, and makes it difficult for the player to recognize the start timing of the big hit game (start of the first round). In the special game effect selection process (S4409), the effect pattern of the selected special game effect (opening effect, round effect, etc.) and information based on the received opening command (opening command type, opening time, start timing) A special game start command that can specify the type of jackpot game related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set special game start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays a special game effect in accordance with the progress status of the big hit game. On the display screen 7a.

  More specifically, when the type of jackpot is 15R first jackpot, 12R second jackpot or 12R third jackpot in the low probability timeless state, the opening time (8000 ms) that is set is used. Then, an effect (start effect) showing that the player can easily recognize that the big hit game will start from now on is executed, and then a predetermined round effect (big hit game effect) with the start of the first round in the big hit game To start. As the start effect, for example, characters such as “congratulations”, “big hit”, and “probable big hit” are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the big hit game starts from now on (a lot of prize balls) An image display that gives an impression that a game capable of acquiring a game starts) can be given. On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is 7R fourth jackpot and 7R fifth jackpot, the opening time is 1900 ms (1.9 seconds). In this opening time, the player can easily recognize the start of the jackpot game. Special effects (starting effects as described above) are not performed specially.

  As a result, it is easy to recognize that the effect executed in the opening period of 8000 ms, such as 15R first big hit, will start the big hit game compared to the effect executed in the opening period of 19000 ms, such as 7R fifth big hit. It is considered a possible production. In addition, after the start effect that is executed using the opening period of 8000 ms, such as the 15R first big hit, the round effect is started separately from this start effect, so the big hit game also starts from this point. Can be easily recognized. Here, an effect executed at least during a big hit game may be referred to as a “special effect”. For example, the round effect that starts after the end of the start effect of the 15R first big hit may be a “first special effect”.

  Also, in the case of 7R 4 big hits and 7R 5 big hits, a start effect that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the big hit game starts is not executed during the opening period. "Direction" is supposed to be performed. Since this “VS chance effect” does not directly notify that the jackpot game starts, the player starts the jackpot game as compared to the 15R first jackpot start effect or the first special effect. It is said that the production is difficult to recognize. Further, the “VS chance effect” can be started during the execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the 7R fourth big hit or the 7R fifth big hit. In addition, since it is executed as a series of effects from the middle of the variation display of the identification information to the time of the big hit game (until the end of the big hit game), depending on the player, the impression as if the variation display of the identification information continues You may receive it. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the start of the big hit game. For example, the “VS chance effect” that starts in the middle of the variable display of the identification information of the 7R fifth jackpot and continues during the opening period (1.9S) and the jackpot game may be set as the “second special effect”. . Further, the “VS chance effect” executed at the time of the 7R fourth big hit may be the “third special effect”.

  In particular, when the gaming state is a low probability timeless state (normal state) and 7R fifth big hit, the amount of profit (number of prize balls) that can be obtained is larger than other big hits (15R big hit, 12R big hit) In addition, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a state (normal state) without a low probability time. In addition, since it is assumed that “the specific area non-passing planned big hit”, it does not become a high probability state. On the other hand, if the other big hit (15R big hit or 12R big hit, etc.), the gaming state after the big hit game is the high probability high base state (high probability state) or the low probability high base state (short time state) Set to That is, as a big hit that normally occurs in the low probability short-time state (related to special symbol 1), the 7R fifth big hit can be said to be the big hit with the lowest profit compared to the other big hits. If the special symbol win / loss determination result is a big hit, if the big hit type is the 7R fifth big hit, the player is not a little discouraged, and in the worst case, the player's motivation may be reduced. The possibility becomes even more remarkable if the jackpot finally obtained after playing for a long time is the 7R fifth jackpot.

  Therefore, as described above, by making it difficult for the player to understand the start of the big hit game related to the 7R fifth big hit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation and to maintain and improve the game entertainment. In addition, a player who does not notice the start of the big hit game related to the 7R fifth big hit becomes a special game state in which a predetermined amount of game profit (prize ball) can be obtained even though the big hit game has not started. Sometimes it is thought that. In such a case, despite the fact that the jackpot game is executed with a low profit, it is possible to enhance the game interest. Also, for the big hit game related to the 7R fourth big hit, although the gaming state after the big hit game is a highly accurate and high base state, the earned profit amount is small compared with other big hit games, so this is also the big hit game It is possible to exert a certain effect by making it difficult to recognize the start of. Since the gaming state after the execution of the second special effect related to the 7R fifth big hit (after the big hit game is finished) is a low probability low base state (normal state), in this second special effect, whether or not the special symbol is determined It is also possible to execute an effect that is common to the effect that is executed when the result of the determination is off. Thereby, during execution of the second special effect, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the player receives an impression that the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, since the gaming state after the execution of the third special effect related to the 7R fourth jackpot (after the jackpot game is finished) is a high-accuracy high-base state (a high probability state), It is also possible to execute an effect common to the effect that is executed when the result of the determination is successful.

  Here, the “common effects” include effects that are partly different and partly the same among the effects that are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the same effects. . In addition, “partial effects are the same” includes those that produce an effect using the character image of the same character and those that produce an effect using the same image data (the difference in only the display size is included in the same effect) . “Partial effect is different” means, for example, that the character image executed in the effect is the same, but the display mode and color of the background are different, or the character image is the same, but whether or not the design (effect design) is displayed. It is possible to list different aspects.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4410). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (YES in S4410), a special game end effect (ending effect) pattern or special An ending effect selection process for selecting the type or the like of the effect mode after the game ends is performed (S4411), and the process of S4412 (FIG. 44) is performed. In the first embodiment, an ending command is transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the type of jackpot and whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game (second round). The length of the ending period (ending time) is specified by the ending command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, as a result of the special symbol success / failure determination in the low probability low base state, the ending time when the big hit type is the 15R first big hit and the 15R sixth big hit is as follows. If there is a passage, it is 17000 ms (17 seconds), and if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, it is 8000 ms (8 seconds). The details of the difference in the ending times of the 15R first big hit and the 15R sixth big hit will be described later.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as a result of the special symbol success / failure determination in the low probability low base state, the ending time when the big hit type is 12R second big hit and 12R third big hit is set as the game ball to the specific area 39. The same 8000 ms (8 seconds) is used when there is no passage, and the content (ending effect pattern) of the ending effect to be executed is the same. In this way, the ending time and the ending effect are the same regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39 because the “probability non-notification state (non- This is because the notification mode) is generated. That is, as described above, for the 12R second jackpot and the 12R third jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the opening mode (opening pattern) of the jackpot during the jackpot game, the performance related to the jackpot, and the like. Has become difficult for players. The game state after the big hit game related to the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit is the “highly accurate high base state” or the “low accurate high base state”, but for the player, it is a high base state. This is a “probability non-notification state” in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a high probability state although it can be recognized. The ending time and the ending effect are set to be the same in order to improve the game performance and the gaming interest in this “probability non-notification state”. The same applies to the 2R seventh big hit and the 2R eighth big hit.

  Then, in the ending effect selection process (S4411), the effect pattern of the selected ending effect and information based on the received ending command (type of ending command, ending time, type of jackpot related to the ended jackpot game, after jackpot game ends A special game end command that can specify the production mode of the sub-control board 90 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the set special game end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays an effect related to the end of the big hit game on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Run on. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4408 that the opening command is not received (NO in S4408), the process proceeds to S4410 without performing the special game effect selection process, and it is determined that the ending command is not received in S4410. In the case (NO in S4410), the process proceeds to S4412 (FIG. 44) without performing the ending effect selection process.

  In S4412, it is determined whether or not a specific area passing command is received from the main control board 80 (S4412). If it is determined that a specific area passing command is received (YES in S4412), the specific area is within the specific area effective period. When the V passing flag indicating that a game ball has passed to 39 (V passing) is turned ON (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414, and it is determined that the specific area passing command has not been received (S4412). NO), the process proceeds to S4414 without turning on the V passing flag. When the V passage flag is turned ON in S4413, a V passage designation command for notifying that there has been a V passage is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. When the set V passing designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines whether the big hit game being executed is the 15R first big hit or the 15R sixth big hit. If it is a big hit game (15R big hit game), a V pass notification effect for notifying that there has been a V pass is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Examples of the V pass notification effect include displaying a character image of “V” on the display screen 7a and outputting a sound effect indicating V pass. On the other hand, the jackpot game being executed is a jackpot game other than the 15R jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game related to the 12R second jackpot or 12R3 jackpot (12R jackpot game), or the 7R fourth jackpot or 7R fifth jackpot In the case of the big hit game (7R big hit game) or the big hit game related to 2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit (2R big hit game), the V passing notification effect described above is not executed. As described above, after the 12R jackpot game ends and after the 2R jackpot game ends, the “probability non-notification state” is entered, so even if there is a V passage, the fact is not notified. Further, in the case of 7R big hit game, an effect corresponding to V passing or V not passing is performed in “VS chance effect” described later, so even if there is V passing, at this time (at the time of receiving V passing designation command) The fact is not notified. However, in order to make the game fair, the V passing notification effect may be performed even in the case of 12R big hit, 7R big hit and 2R big hit. In this case, it is desirable that the V passing notification effect be performed in a manner that is less recognizable than a normal effect in order not to impair the effect of the non-probability game performance and the VS chance effect. Specifically, characters, figures, symbols, and the like indicating the occurrence of V passage are displayed small in the corners of the display screen 7a, or included in an LED display (for example, the effect display 102) that is different from the image display device 7. Illustrative examples include turning on or blinking the LED.

  Subsequently, in S4414, it is determined whether or not a round start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4414). If it is determined that a round start command has not been received (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4421. If it is determined that a round start command has been received (YES in S4414), the round designation command corresponding to the received round start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4415), and the processing of S4416 is performed. Transition. The round start command transmitted from the main control board 80 includes information that can specify the number of rounds to be started (starting round). Based on the round start command, the number of rounds of the start round is specified, and a round designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer. When the round designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 generates a round effect according to the number of rounds specified based on the round designation command. It is executed on the display screen 7a.

  Subsequently, in S4416, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds specified based on the round start command received in S4114, that is, the number of rounds of the start round is 3R (S4416), and if it is not 3R (NO in S4416), The process proceeds to S4421, and if it is 3R (YES in S4416), it is determined whether or not the V-pass flag is ON (S4417). If it is determined that the V-pass flag is ON (YES in S4417), the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the second round of the big hit game, that is, the V round (specific round, also referred to as specific entry game). Therefore, the V pass effect designation command for instructing the execution of the effect display corresponding to the passage is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4418), and the V pass flag is set. Is turned OFF (S4419), and the process proceeds to S4421. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4417 that the V passing flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S4417), the game ball has not passed the specific area 39 in the V round (V not passed). Therefore, the V non-passing effect designation command for instructing execution of the effect display corresponding to the non-passing is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4420), and the process proceeds to S4421. When the V passing effect designation command or the V non-passing effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 performs a predetermined time after the third round of the current big hit game. In addition, an effect corresponding to V passing or V not passing is executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Here, when the jackpot game being executed is a 7R jackpot game, an effect corresponding to V passing or V not passing is performed in a “VS chance effect” described later. In the case of a 15R big hit game, a round effect corresponding to V passage or a round effect corresponding to V non-passing is performed as the round effect after the third round. In the case of a 15R big hit game, since the V notification effect has already been executed at the timing when the V pass flag is turned on as described above, the effect corresponding to the V pass or V non-pass is not performed in the third round and thereafter. Also good. Also, in the case of 12R jackpot game and 2R jackpot game, as described above, after the jackpot game is ended, it becomes “probability non-notification state”, so that the jackpot game is at least before the jackpot game ends. In a predetermined period after the end, in principle, an effect corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Finally, other processing is performed in S4421, and this processing is completed. As other processing performed in S4421, processing based on a received command (for example, a normal symbol variation start command or a normal symbol variation stop command) other than the above-described commands is performed.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the change effect start process (S4402) performed based on reception of the change start command in the received command analysis process (S4301) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the variation production start process (S4402), first, in S4501, the production control microcomputer 91 uses a random production decision random number, a random announcement decision random number, a production design decision random number, a specific production decision random number, and the like. The effect determination random number processing (S4501) for acquiring the various effect determination random numbers is performed. In the first embodiment, at the timing when the variation start command is received from the main control unit 80, the process of S4501 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value, the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the change control command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information for designating the variation pattern includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, the first special symbol success determination or the second special symbol success determination. And the symbol information for designating the jackpot type are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, an effect symbol game effect that starts this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that these variation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining an effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect in the image display device 7. If the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as characters, items, and background images that appear, and the effect symbol game effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when providing a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.), different game effects may be executable depending on the effect mode. In the first embodiment, the production mode A (mode status “1”) is executed when the low-accuracy low base state is controlled, and the production mode B (mode status “2”) is the low-accuracy high base state (short time). It is executed when the game state is controlled, and the effect mode C (mode status “3”) is executed when the high-accuracy base state (probability changing game state) is controlled. Therefore, the player can grasp the current gaming state by confirming which of the effect modes is A to C.

  In addition, in the effect mode D (mode status “4”) or effect mode E (mode status “5”), the big hit games related to the 12R second big hit, 12R third big hit, 2R seventh big hit, and 2R eighth big hit are performed. This is executed when the low-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy base state is controlled after being broken and is in the “probability non-notification state”. Therefore, when the production mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the production mode, the player grasps whether the probability state of the special symbol success / failure determination is a high probability state or a low probability state (normal state). It is difficult to do. In that sense, the production modes D and E are probabilistic non-notification modes.

  Next, in S4504, a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern) to be performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like is set (S4504). . Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), as a variation presentation pattern determination table, the big hit time corresponding to the current presentation mode A variation production pattern determination table is set. In the first embodiment, since a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, in S4504, from among these variable effect pattern determination tables The table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol, etc.), and a plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. Has been. In S4504, any one of the plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables is set.

  Subsequently, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set (S4505). . As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thereby, in the effect design game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach with effect design game effect), when the character effect performed using a specific character (character effect design game effect), the reach effect or character The case where the production is not executed (reach no production design game production) is determined. The reach effect is, for example, that the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big win In the case where a mode (a big hit mode, a specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining one Refers to an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol that completes the jackpot mode in a state where the variable display is continued. In S4505, based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is an odd symbol such as “777” when the special symbol success / failure determination result is 15R big hit, and “666” etc. when the 12R big hit It is said that the even-numbered design is a doublet. In addition, when the reach is out of reach, one of the three effect designs 8L, 8C, and 8R such as “787” is different from the other effect designs, and when the reach is out of reach, “635”, etc. Among the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, at least one effect symbol is selected from the different effect symbols. In the first embodiment, the 3 effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the same manner (disjoint) as in the case of losing even when the 2R big hit and the 7R big hit. However, for 2R jackpot and 7R jackpot, a predetermined chance such as “135” or a dedicated symbol such as “3 * 3” may be stopped. In addition, the stop display mode of the above-mentioned effect design 8 is an example, and when a big hit is made, what can be stopped and displayed as the stop effect design can be appropriately changed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, etc. Super reach C, character production, etc. are set. In S4505, based on the variation production pattern determination table, any of these productions is performed or these productions are not performed (this is also referred to as “normal variation”). Say). Then, when the reachable effect game effect is executed, any reach effect is set based on the change pattern designation command and the change effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the effect symbol game effect, it is set to be more likely to be a big hit than when the normal reach effect is executed. In other words, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production with a high jackpot reliability (possibility of being a big hit) as compared to the reach (normal reach) production. The reach effect can be set (executed) mainly when a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30000 ms or more is received. Further, in the first embodiment, as a kind of super reach (SP reach), a confrontation reach effect in which an ally character (hereinafter referred to as “friend character”) and an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy character”) never win or lose ( The third effect) is provided, and the winning of the jackpot is notified when the ally character wins in the confrontation reach effect. There are four types of confrontation reach production patterns, confrontation reach AD, and the enemy characters (opposition opponents) are different for each confrontation reach. Such a confrontation reach effect can be set (executed) when a variation pattern designation command designating a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30000 ms or more is received.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the variation pattern specified based on the variation pattern information included in the received variation start command (variation pattern designation command) is one of the big hit variation patterns P1 to P3, When the jackpot type specified based on the symbol information included in the command is 7R jackpot (7R fourth jackpot, 7R fifth jackpot), the “VS chance” is started from a predetermined time during the execution of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect). "Direction" is to be started. This “VS chance effect” is performed until the 7R big hit game ends, and is a variable effect and a special game effect. Details of the “VS chance effect” will be described later.

  In S4505, a variable effect pattern corresponding to any of various variable effects including these “reach effect” and “VS chance effect” is set in response to the result of the processing in S4501 to S4504 (S4505). Then, in S4506, a change effect start command for starting a play symbol game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern set in S4505 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4506). End the start process. When the variation effect start command set in S4506 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Specific production start processing]
Next, the specific effect start process (S4302) performed in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described. The specific effect means the above-mentioned “VS chance effect”. As shown in FIG. 46, in the specific effect start process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is being executed (S4601), and if not (NO in S4601). If the process is finished and executed (YES in S4601), the process proceeds to S4602, and the fluctuation effect being executed is the fluctuation effect relating to “7R big hit (7R fourth big hit, 7R fifth big hit)”. It is determined whether or not (S4602). Then, if the variation effect being executed is not a variation effect related to “7R big hit” (NO in S4602), that is, any one of “out”, “15R big hit”, “12R big hit” and “2R big hit”. If it is such a variation effect (NO in S4602), the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the variation effect being executed is a variation effect related to “7R big hit” (YES in S4602), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (S4603). In the first embodiment, the start timing of the specific effect (VS chance effect) is set to the timing when the remaining execution time (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol) of the variation effect related to “7R big hit” is 3 seconds. The remaining execution time of the variation effect is, for example, started in response to the setting of the variation effect start command in S4506 described above, so that the variation effect is substantially synchronized with the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol on the main control board 80 side. Can be specified by a timer that can measure the execution time (time measuring means configured by a program of the effect control microcomputer 91).

  If it is determined in S4603 that it is not the time to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (NO in S4603), if it is determined that it is time to finish the process and start (YES in S4603), the specific effect (VS chance) An effect pattern (specific effect pattern) is selected from a plurality of predetermined effect patterns, and the selected specific effect pattern is set (S4604). In S4604, a random number lottery based on a random number for determining a specific effect is performed, and any one of a plurality of specific effect patterns is selected. The random number lottery here is performed using the specific effect determining random number included in the effect determining random number acquired in S4501. Then, a specific effect start command for starting a specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the effect pattern set in S4604 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4605), and the specific effect start process is terminated. To do. When the specific effect start command set in S4605 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 specifies the effect pattern of the specific effect specified based on the specific effect start command. That is, the predetermined image data corresponding to the specific effect pattern set in S4605 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the “VS chance effect” based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Run.

  Here, as described above, the “VS chance effect” as the specific effect is started at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds of the variable effect related to the 7R jackpot, and thereafter, is performed until the 7R jackpot game ends. Yes. Further, the plurality of specific effect patterns to be selected in the process of S4604 are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and specifically, four types of specific effect patterns are stored. As the production pattern (specific production pattern) of the “VS chance production” of the first embodiment, the same competition scenes (confrontation images) as the four competition reach (confrontation reach A to D) in the above-described competition reach production are displayed. There are four specific effect patterns (confrontation A to confrontation D), and in S4604, any one of these four specific effect patterns is selected and set, and a confrontation scene based on the set specific effect pattern (Any of confrontation A to confrontation D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the execution of the 7R jackpot game. The ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100 stores in advance image data corresponding to the four confrontation reach in the confrontation reach effect, and the image data is used when executing the confrontation reach effect. However, since the same confrontation scene (confrontation image) is also displayed in the VS chance effect, the image data is also used when the VS chance effect is executed. Thus, by diverting the image data used for the reach effect (variation effect) to the VS chance effect (variation effect and special game effect), the amount of data stored in the image ROM can be reduced. In addition, the same battle scene effect (second effect) as the confrontation reach effect (third effect) as a variable effect is also performed as a special game effect (round effect) during the 7R jackpot game. It is possible to give the player the impression that the variation effect (confrontation reach effect) is being performed in spite of the presence.

  When a specific effect (VS chance effect) is started by the process of S4302, and an opening command, an ending command, a round start command, etc. are received in the received command analysis process (S4301) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) (S4408, S4410) , S4414), the process related to the execution of the effect display based on the command reception is performed as the process related to the execution (progress) of the specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the specific effect pattern set in the process of S4604 described above. In addition, when the V pass effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passage effect designation command (S4420) is transmitted to the image control board 100 after the start of the specific effect (VS chance effect), the CPU of the image control board 100 A process of displaying the ending of a confrontation scene (confrontation effect) in a specific effect (VS chance effect) being executed in correspondence with V passing or V not passing is performed. That is, the specific effect pattern set in the process of S4604 includes information (confrontation type information) indicating which of the confrontation A to confrontation D corresponds to, but includes information indicating the confrontation result (win / loss). There is nothing. In the first embodiment, for each of the confrontation A to confrontation D, image data for displaying “the ending of the confronting scene corresponding to V passage” and “the ending of the confronting scene corresponding to V non-passing” It is stored in advance in a ROM (image ROM) of the control board 100. Therefore, when the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the ending of the confrontation scene, the image data for ending display corresponding to the confronting scene being executed is used as the received V passing effect designation command or the V non-passing effect designation command. Based on the read-out and the effect display using the image data, the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) is displayed in a mode corresponding to V passage or V non-passage. Note that the image data used to indicate the ending (big hit or miss) of the confrontation reach effect (variation effect) may also be used for the image data displaying the ending of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect).

  The above is the main processing of the production control in the first embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the “V passing big hit” and “V non-passing big hit” with the same number of rounds are used. In the “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit”, as described above, the specific effect (in this example, “VS chance effect”) is performed. This “VS Chance Produce” and the above-mentioned “7R 4th big hit (V passing expected big hit)” and “7R 5th big hit (V not passing expected big hit)” 1st to 2nd rounds of the second big winning opening 35 The linkage with the characteristic opening pattern (opening / closing operation) makes it more difficult to distinguish (discrimination) between “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit”, and the gaming state after the big hit game is a high probability state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see) whether or not. Hereinafter, the “VS chance effect” will be described in detail.

[VS chance production]
53 and 54 show a series of display modes from the start (occurrence) to the end of the VS chance effect executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. The VS chance effects (specific effects) of the first embodiment are mainly shown in “introduction effects (introduction scenes)” shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to 53 (d) and FIGS. 53 (e) to (f). The “selection effect (selection scene)” shown in FIG. 54 and the “confrontation effect (confrontation scene)” shown in FIGS. 54 (g) to (h1) and (h2). As described above, the first embodiment has four specific effect patterns, and the contents of the “confrontation effect (confrontation scene)” are different for each specific effect pattern (confrontation AD). As will be described in detail later, the selection effect includes an effect (selection effect 2 described later) indicating which of the confrontations A to D is selected (selection result). For this reason, at least “selection effect” and “confrontation effect” are each provided with four effect modes (effect patterns).

  First, FIG. 53 (a) shows the display screen 7a in a state where the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out of reach of “5”, “6”, and “5”, respectively, in the progression process of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect). A state where a temporary stop is displayed in the approximate center is shown. Temporary stop display means that the special symbol change display has not been completed yet, and that the special symbol has not been stopped, that is, the special symbol success / failure determination result has not yet been displayed deterministically (deterministic display). Means that. Therefore, in the temporary stop display, the individual effect symbols 8 are slightly moved on the display screen 7a to such an extent that the type (numbers etc.) of the effect symbols displayed can be recognized (swaying). Also called fluctuation). When a girl character image appears from this state as shown in FIG. 53 (b), three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (effect symbol display area 7b) are displayed in a small size on the upper left of the display screen 7a. (Reduced display), the variable display is resumed with the small size at that position (introduction effect 1). This “appearance of girl character” and “reduction display of effect design 8” by introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53 (b) are performed based on the determination that it is the start timing of the specific effect in S4603 described above. In the first embodiment, the timing when the remaining time until the end of symbol variation (remaining variation time of the special symbol) is about 3 seconds is set as the start timing of the specific effect.

  Then, when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the display of the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53 (b), the characters “VS chance” are displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53 (c), and the VS chance effect is displayed. Occurrence (start) is notified to the player (introduction effect 2). At this time, the sub control board 90 receives the change stop command from the main control board 80 (S4406), and the image control board 100 receives the change effect end command transmitted by the sub control board 90 based on the command. As a result, when the introductory effect 2 is executed, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are variably displayed in a small size on the upper left of the display screen 7a are in the same manner as in the case of detachment (disjoint eyes: here “325”) is stopped (determined). Here, the final display of the effect symbol 8 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is performed in an extremely short time, and when the final display time elapses, the effect symbol 8 is erased from the display screen 7a (non-display). The display mode of the display screen 7a shifts to the mode (introduction effect 3) shown in FIG. 53 (d). For this reason, the symbol confirmation effect (fourth effect) related to the stop display (determination display) of the effect symbol 8 performed when the introduction effect 2 (FIG. 53C) is executed is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. It will be. In the first embodiment, the fixed display time of the effect symbol 8 in the introduction effect 2 is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Also, an effect display related to the “introduction effect (first effect)” shown in FIGS. 53B to 53D, that is, an effect of displaying mainly a girl character image from the introductory effect 1 to the introductory effect 3 (first effect). ) Is an effect displayed both during the execution of the fluctuating effect shown in FIG. 53 (b) (during symbol fluctuation) and during the jackpot game shown in FIG. 53 (d). In other words, it is both a variation effect and a special game effect.

  The state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the introduction effect 2 in FIG. 53 (c) is performed is a state in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a 7R big hit symbol. At this time, the 7R big hit from the main control board 80 is displayed. The sub control board 90 receives the opening command according to (S4408), and the image control board 100 receives a special game start command from the sub control board 90 based on the opening command. Thereby, on the display screen 7a of the monk display device 7, the introduction effect 3 of FIG. 53 (d) is executed. Here, the 7R jackpot opening period (1900 ms) is shorter than the other jackpot opening periods (8000 ms). In the 7R jackpot opening period, a so-called opening that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, the start of a jackpot game, etc. The effect image (girl character image) displayed in the introduction effect 2 is continuously displayed in the introduction effect 3 without performing the effect. That is, the background images of the introduction effects 2 and 3 are the same. As described above, “the opening period is shortened and the opening image is not performed and the background image is not changed”, and the above-mentioned “short-term confirmation display of the effect symbol 8 (in this example, confirmation display of the broken eyes) and the effect symbol 8 are performed. Due to the synergistic effect of “erasing”, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the timing at which the first opening of the second grand prize opening 35 (V attacker) is started (start timing of the big hit game).

  As shown in FIG. 53 (d), in the introductory effect 3, a message urging the player to enter the game ball into the second big prize opening 35 (V attacker) (let's aim for the attacker), On the other hand, a launch navigation image 8n indicating the launch position of the player is displayed. Thereafter, until the third round of 7R jackpot game is started, that is, until the second round of 7R jackpot game ends and the interval period (2 seconds) ends, the display mode of the display screen 7a is as shown in FIG. The introduction effect 3 of 53 (d) changes to the selection effects 1 and 2 of FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (f). In the selection effect 1 in FIG. 53 (e), there is an effect (hereinafter also referred to as “roulette effect”) in which the confrontation executed in the current VS chance effect is “confrontation AD” in a roulette format. In the selection effect 2 of FIG. 53 (f), the result of the roulette effect is displayed together with the enemy character image 8b. This selection result corresponds to the specific effect pattern selected and set in S4604 in the specific effect start process (S4302) described above. Such a change from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 occurs at the timing when about 60000 ms (6 seconds) have elapsed since the start of the second V-attacker opening (16000 ms opening shown in FIG. 49) after the start of the 7R big hit game. Done. And the selection effect 2 (the result display of the roulette effect) is performed until the third round of the 7R big hit game is started. With such a selection effect, it becomes possible to increase the player's interest in the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) that will be started later, and the effect of the VS chance effect will be enhanced to improve the gaming interest in the big hit game. It becomes possible to plan. Further, since the selection effect 1 and the subsequent ones in FIG. 53 (e) are the big hit game, the fired navigation image 8n instructing the player to make a right turn (here, “right-handed” characters and “right direction” are shown). Symbol) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. The confrontation A to D (confrontation effect pattern) to be selected in the roulette effect is an effect in which the confrontation scene is configured in the same manner as the confrontation reach A to D in the aforementioned confrontation reach effect.

  Here, until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows the case of either “7R fourth jackpot” or “7R fifth jackpot” in FIG. ) To (f), a series of effects (first effects), that is, introduction effects 1 to 3 and selection effects 1 and 2 are performed. One round and two rounds (V rounds) of “7R fourth big hit”, In the first round of “7R 5th big hit”, the effect display mode is the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 49, in the first and second rounds (V round) of “7R fourth big hit” and in the first round of “7R fifth big hit”, the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) The mode of the opening / closing operation is the same. Therefore, for the player, at least the 7R 4th big hit and the 7R 5th big hit will occur from the end of the fluctuating stage of 7R big hit until the third round of 7R big hit game starts. It is extremely difficult to recognize (discriminate) whether or not it is done. As a result, at least from the start of the 7R big hit game (first start of V-attacker opening shown in FIG. 49, introduction effect 3 of FIG. 53 (d)) until the end of round game after the second V-attacker release ( 49 until the start of the interval after the second V-attacker opening shown in FIG. 49, until the selection effect 2 in FIG. 53 (f), that is, “7R 4th big hit” 1 round and 2 rounds (V round), “ Each round of “7R 5th big hit” makes it possible for the player to recognize it as one “chance round” in which a game ball enters a V-attacker and aims to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. . In this sense, through one chance round (1 round + 2 rounds), it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit game is made a high probability state based on whether or not the gaming ball has passed to the specific area 39 It can also be understood as a “decision game”.

  And after the start of 7R big hit game, when V Attacker is released for the second time (16000ms open), in the case of "7R 4th big hit", the previous first release is done as one round. When the V-attacker is released for the second time, the player has advanced to the second round (V-round). During this release, the movable piece 150 in the V-attacker is in an operating state (specific area release). When the game ball enters the V-attacker at the time of release, at least one of the entered game balls passes through the specific area 39 with a high probability (see FIG. 47B). On the other hand, in the case of “7R 5 big hits”, the previous first release has been completed as in the case of “7R 4 big hits”, but it is still in the first round (not progressing to 2 rounds). Therefore, when the V-attacker is released for the second and subsequent times in the round (when the second to seventh times shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 are opened), the movable piece 150 is not in an operating state (specific area is closed). Even if the ball is made to enter the V attacker, the game ball that has entered does not pass through the specific area 39 (see FIG. 47A). As described above, in the first embodiment, the difficulty (difficulty) of determining the 7R big hit type is increased from both the opening / closing operation mode and the effect display mode of the V attacker (second big prize opening 35). In particular, in order to carry out the second V-attacker release of “7R 4th big hit” as 2 rounds (V round) with the same progress as the 2nd V attacker release of “7R 5th big hit”, “7R 4th big hit” The first round of V-attacker release in the first round is completed in a short time (100 ms release), thereby ensuring the same identity as the first V-attacker release of “7R 5th big hit” (FIG. 49). See). This makes it possible for the player to recognize a “chance round” having a different possibility of passing V as a “chance round” that is difficult to discern the difference. For this reason, the first round of V attacker release (100 ms release) of “7R 4th big hit” is performed, so to speak, is a dummy round (pseudo round, non-specific round, non-specific entry game) It can be said.

  And in 7R 4th big hit, when the interval period that reaches first after the second opening of V attacker ends, it advances to the 3rd round, and in 7R 5th big hit, the interval period that comes first after the second opening of V attacker When is completed, the process proceeds to the second round (V round), and after the V attacker is released for a short time (100 ms) in this round, the process proceeds to the third round (see FIG. 49). With the start of the third round, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is confrontation based on the confrontation content (confrontation effect pattern) indicated by the selection effect 2 from the selection effect 2 in FIG. 53 (f). It changes into the confrontation effect of FIG.54 (g) which displays a scene, and the friendly character image 8a is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thus, when the “chance round” ends and the third round starts, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes greatly. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the V attacker short opening (opening and closing for a moment) in the “7R fifth big hit” before the start of the third round, that is, the short opening of the V attacker for the second round. . In addition, since the V-attacker opening time in 2 rounds (V-round) of 7R fifth big is 100ms (0.1 seconds), the possibility that a game ball enters the V-attacker is very low, The possibility of passing through the specific area 39 is extremely low.

  When the confrontation effect of FIG. 54 (g) is displayed with the start of the third round, the sub control board 90 receives the 3R round start command from the main control board 80 (S4414, S4415), and based on this. The image control board 100 has received the V passing effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passing effect designation command (S4420) from the sub-control board 90. In the third and subsequent rounds, a confrontation scene (confrontation effect) between the teammate character image 8a and the enemy character image 8b is developed on the display screen 7a as the round progresses, and the confrontation by the end of the seventh round of the 7R jackpot game The ending of is displayed. The ending of the confrontation scene differs depending on whether the image control board 100 receives a V passing effect designation command or a V non-passing effect designation command. The result of the previous chance round depends on the ending of the confrontation scene. Will be shown. That is, if the V passing effect designation command is received, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 in the previous chance round and will be in a high probability state after the big hit game is finished, so the display screen 7a Is a teammate character victory effect shown in FIG. 54 (h1). On the other hand, if the V non-passing effect designation command is received, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the previous chance round, and does not enter a high probability state (becomes a normal state) after the big hit game ends. Since it is confirmed, the display mode of the display screen 7a is the teammate character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54 (h2). From this, it can be said that the effect (confrontation effect) relating to the confrontation scene shown in FIGS. 54 (g), (h1), and (h2) is a “result notification effect” indicating the result of the previous chance round. It should be noted that the “result notification effect” can be understood as “the entire confrontation effect” in the broad sense, and “the ally character victory effect” and “the ally character defeat effect” in the narrow sense. If the teammate character victory effect shown in FIG. 54 (h1) is executed, there is a high possibility that the current 7R jackpot is “7R fourth jackpot”, and the teammate character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54 (h2) is executed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the current 7R big hit is “7R fifth big hit”.

  Note that the confrontation effect (second effect) performed from (g) to (h1) or (h2) in FIG. 54, that is, from 3 rounds to 7 rounds of 7R jackpot game (across multiple round games) The confrontation effect (second effect) indicates the same confrontation scene as the confrontation reach effect (an aspect of SP reach) performed as a variable effect. For each of the confrontation effects (second effects) of confrontation A to D, a teammate character victory effect that is a V passing mode and a teammate character defeating effect that is a V non-passing mode are provided. As an effect mode developed from the start to the end of the confrontation effect (confrontation scene) (end display), an effect mode that leads to the victory of the ally character and an effect mode that leads to the defeat of the V ally character are provided for each confrontation effect. Yes. In addition, the VS chance effect (specific effect) is an effect design that takes into consideration the progress (round digestion) of a round game based on the entry of a specified number of game balls into the V attacker and the specified opening time of the V attacker. Therefore, in the introduction effects 1 to 3 and the selection effects 1 and 2 (see FIGS. 53 (b) to (f)) performed until the third round is started, the game ball is appropriately fired. As long as it progresses according to the state of game balls entering the V-attacker until the start of the third round (round progress status) Proceed with round digestion. Similarly, the confrontation effect (see FIGS. 54 (g), (h1), and (h2)) performed from the third round to the seventh round also applies to the seventh round as long as the game ball is properly fired. Even if it takes time for the round digestion due to the delay of the launch, etc., it will proceed according to the round digestion, as it progresses according to the game ball entering status (round progress status) to the V attackers until the end I will do it. Then, the confrontation effect (VS chance effect) ends at the end of the seventh round.

  When 7 rounds of 7R jackpot game are completed, the sub-control board 90 receives an ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), and the special game end command from the sub-control board 90 based on this is sent to the image control board 100. Receive. Thereby, the display mode of the display screen 7a is changed from the ally character victory effect shown in FIG. 54 (h1) to the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 (i1) or from the ally character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54 (h2). The fluctuating effect shown in 54 (i2) is obtained. When the game ball passes the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R fourth big hit game this time, an ending image (here, “probability change mode entry”) related to the ending effect shown in FIG. 54 (i1) is displayed. Is done. In the first embodiment, although not shown, the display mode is the same as that shown in FIG. 54 (i1), and the ending image is displayed with the text display of “short time mode entry” instead of “probability change mode entry”. . This is an ending image displayed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R fourth big hit game. However, since the 7R fourth big hit is a “scheduled big hit through a specific area”, if the game is played normally, the possibility of displaying the “short-time mode entry” image is low. Also, in the case of 7R fifth big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round, it does not pass through the variation effect screen shown in FIG. 54 (i2) (effect symbols 8L, 8C). , 8R display). The ending image shown in FIG. 54 (i2) is an effect that “shows the transition to the normal mode”.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as described above, the ending time specified based on the ending command from the main control board 80 is different between the 7R fourth big hit and the 7R fifth big hit. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 at the 7R fourth big hit in the low probability low base state, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a is changed from the mode of FIG. 54 (h1) to that of FIG. 54 (i1). When the mode changes, the ending time is 17000 ms (17 seconds). Further, in the low probability low base state, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 at the 7R fourth big hit, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a is changed from the mode of FIG. When the mode changes, the ending time is 8000 ms (8 seconds). Further, when the 7R fifth big hit is made in the low probability low base state, the display mode of the display screen 7a is changed from the mode of FIG. 54 (h2) to the mode of FIG. 54 (i2) regardless of whether or not the specific area 39 has passed. The ending time becomes 5000 ms (5 seconds). The difference in the ending time is set to increase the ending time when the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a “probable change gaming state (highly accurate high base state)” advantageous to the player. It is effective to actively show the transition to the “probability gaming state (high probability high base state)” by the ending effect, and the gaming state after the big hit game is “low probability state and non-short time state (low This is because there is little need to spend time notifying that a normal gaming state that has no particular advantage for the player is required.

  In the first embodiment, if the sub-control board 90 receives an ending command from the main control board 80 when the 7R fifth big hit is received (S4410), an effect (ending effect) corresponding to the command is particularly performed. Instead, the display mode of the display screen 7a becomes the mode shown in FIG. 54 (i2) in a short time (5000 ms in this example) after the 7R big hit game ends. The display mode shown in FIG. 54 (i2) is a display mode when a normal variation effect is performed, that is, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed largely in the approximate center of the screen to produce an effect symbol variation game effect. It is a display mode when performing. In addition, when the 7R fifth big hit is reached, the gaming state after the big hit game is in the low base state, so when returning the display mode of the display screen 7a to the display mode when performing a normal variation effect. 54 (i2), a launch navigation image 8n (here, “left-handed” characters and “left-handed” symbols) instructing the player to make a left-hand strike is displayed near the center of the screen.

  The above is the basic flow of the VS chance effect executed in the case of 7R big hit. Although the possibility is low, if the game ball does not pass the specific area 39 at the 7R fourth big hit, the game state after the big hit game is “low probability state and short time state (low probability high base state)” Become. In this case, in the VS chance effect, the teammate character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54 (h2) is displayed as the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect). Then, the ending time specified based on the ending command transmitted from the main control board 80 at the end of the jackpot game is 8000 ms (8 seconds). Although the possibility is low, when the game ball passes the specific area 39 with the 7R fifth big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game is “high probability state and non-short time state (high probability low base state)”. .

  As described above, by performing a series of “VS chance effects (specific effects)” from the end of the special symbol fluctuation display related to the 7R jackpot to the end of the 7R jackpot game, the player can start the jackpot game or the V Since it becomes difficult to recognize the start of the round, it becomes difficult to determine (disregard) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 and the presence / absence of the passing, and as a result, the gaming interest of the gaming machine equipped with the V round is improved. It becomes possible to plan. That is, the introductory effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol related to the 7R jackpot, and after the start of the introductory effect, the special symbol variable display is ended (stop display). While the game situation changes to the start of the big hit game and the start of the V round, the introduction effect does not end at the timing of the situation change, and the background image related to the introduction effect does not change. This makes it difficult to recognize the start of a big hit game or the start of the V round, and further makes it difficult to determine (disregard) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 in the V round, the presence or absence of passage, and the like.

  Also, in the VS chance effect, the confrontation effect that is performed after the selection effect after the introduction effect is the same mode as the confrontation reach effect that is performed during the special symbol variation display. Special effects include an introductory effect that continues during a big hit game (in the first embodiment, during a 7R big hit game), a selection effect that continues after the introduction effect, and a confrontation effect that continues after the selection effect In spite of being inside, it can be expressed as “a series of effects” (development effects as variable effects) related to the variable symbol display. As a result, it is possible to make it harder to recognize the start of a big hit game or the start of the V round, and further determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 in the V round, the presence or absence of passage, and the like. It can be difficult.

  The mode of the confrontation effect in the VS chance effect is the same as the confrontation reach effect as the variation effect, and the number of the effect modes is also the same (four in the first embodiment). Moreover, the image data used in the confrontation reach effect is diverted to the confrontation effect in the 7R big hit game. For this reason, it becomes possible to increase the variation of the confrontation effect in 7R big hit game, without increasing image data (data amount). In addition to this, for each of the plurality of confrontation effects that can be executed in the VS chance effect, an effect mode indicating the end corresponding to the V passage and an effect mode corresponding to the non-V pass are provided. It becomes possible to increase the variation of production. From these, it is possible to enhance the effect of the VS chance effect performed at the time of 7R big hit, and to make the player's consciousness as much as possible toward the effect developed on the display screen 7a. It becomes possible to make it more difficult to determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 in the round, the presence / absence of passage, and the like.

  In addition, after starting the VS chance effect, when performing the symbol finalization effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, that is, during the execution of the introduction effect started at the end of the special symbol variable display related to 7R jackpot Since the final effect is performed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to recognize, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the special symbol is stopped and the 7R big hit game has started, and this is accompanied by this. This makes it difficult to recognize the start timing of the V round. Furthermore, since the “VS chance effect” composed of three effects (effect scenes) of “introduction effect (introduction scene)”, “selection effect (selection scene)” and “confrontation effect (confrontation scene)” is performed, 7R Combined with the difficulty in recognizing the symbol determination effect related to the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression that the big hit has occurred. This makes it possible to effectively improve the gaming interest of 7R jackpot games including chance rounds. Also, if the game ball does not pass the specific area 39 at the 7R fifth big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a low probability low base state, but “VS chance effect” and “recognition of the symbol fixed effect” The difficulty makes it possible to reduce the impression that a big hit has occurred, so that it becomes possible to reduce discouragement when the gaming state becomes a low probability and low base state through a chance round.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the VS chance effect is started from the middle of the special symbol variation display (the final stage), a round game (for example, the second round) performed relatively early among a plurality of round games constituting the big hit game. ) Is a V round, and the remaining round games (for example, the third and subsequent rounds) can be positioned as a round for notifying the result of the V round. And, during the period from the middle of the special symbol variation display (late stage) to the end of the V round, ensure the stage time for performing the stage, etc. to notify the start of the V round (chance round) and the execution (occurring), In the period from the end of the V-round to the end of the remaining round game, it is possible to secure an effect time for performing a result notification effect or the like. As a result, after performing the V round early, it is possible to spend the period for the result notification of the V round until the remaining round games are finished. In this case, the longer the period until the end of the remaining round game, the more effect time of the result notification effect can be obtained. Therefore, after the big hit game is started, the V round is performed at the earliest possible timing. It is desirable to make the execution period of the round game as long as possible.

  In addition, among the 7R big hit games with VS chance effects, in the round games after the third round (3 to 7 rounds), a confrontation effect indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the previous V round The presentation aspect of the confrontation presentation itself is an aspect according to the result of the previous V round. Further, since the image control board 100 receives the V passing effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passing effect designation command (S4420) from the sub control board 90 and performs the confrontation effect based on the received command, the confrontation effect There is no inconvenience that the contents of and the result of the previous V round are not matched. For these reasons, in the remaining round games after the end of the V round, it is possible to produce a highly interesting performance that is consistent with the results of the previous V round, and the effects (the book that will be performed in the remaining round games) In the example, it is possible to enhance the production effect by confrontation production).

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in the special electric accessory process of FIG. 32, the big winning opening closing process (S2115) is executed at the end of each round constituting the jackpot game. Then, it is assumed that the next round is not started until the big prize opening closing process related to each round is completed (completed). Specifically, it depends on the processing of S2115 and S2116 in FIG. According to such processing of the first embodiment, processing related to each round (large winning opening closing processing), for example, interval period setting processing, winning / discharging number coincidence determination processing, retry operation processing, and error notification processing are performed. Confirming the completion, and starting the next round, each round can be executed appropriately and reliably. In addition, if there is a problem in a given round, it is possible to start the next round in a state where the problem has been resolved by taking action to resolve the problem without moving to the next round. .

  By controlling in this way, there is an advantage that each round can be properly terminated and the next round can be appropriately started, but the start time of the next round is delayed and the progress of the jackpot game is progressed. It has the problem of being late. In order to solve this, in the big hit game of the second embodiment, the big winning opening opened in the previous round (becomes ready to enter) and the large winning opening opened (becomes ready to enter) in the subsequent round. Are different from each other, at least a part of the grand prize opening closing process (internal period setting process, input / output match determination process, retry operation process, error notification process) related to the previous round It is supposed to be executed in parallel. Thereby, the waiting time until the start of the next round set between rounds is made as short as possible, and the jackpot game can be advanced promptly and smoothly.

  Here, “to execute at least a part of the grand prize closing process related to the previous round in parallel with the subsequent round”, of course, all these processes (interval period setting process, input / output match determination process) , Retry operation process, error notification process) may be executed in parallel with the subsequent round, or one or more of these processes may be executed in parallel with the subsequent round. The jackpot game is composed of a plurality of rounds (round games), and either one of the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened for each round (becomes ready to enter a ball). It is supposed to be. In addition, the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) opened in the round is opened in a predetermined opening / closing pattern determined for each round.

[Special electric equipment processing (big hit game)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60, the special electric accessory processing (big hit game) according to the second embodiment will be described. Other control processing, the board surface structure, and the like are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. In addition, since S2151 to S2155 of the special electric accessory process (S1108) of the second embodiment are the same as the special electric accessory process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. Next, when it is determined in S2155 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2155), a first big prize opening closing process described later is performed (S2156), and then a second big winning prize closing process described later is performed (S2157). ), The process proceeds to S2158. Here, as will be described in detail later, the first big prize opening closing process (S2156) means that in the big hit game, when a round that opens the first big prize opening 30 is executed, all opening / closing operations of the round are performed. This is a process (also referred to as “confirmation process”) to be executed after completion (after completion of the round). Similarly, in the second big prize opening closing process (S2157), in the big hit game, when a round that opens the second big prize opening 35 is executed, all opening / closing operations of the round are finished ( This is processing (also referred to as “confirmation processing”) executed after the round is completed.

  If it is determined in S2158 that it is the round start time (YES in S2158), the process proceeds to S2159. Since the processing of S2159 to S2163 is the same as the special electric accessory processing of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. If it is determined in S2155 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2155), the process proceeds to S2171. Since the processes of S2171 to S2175 are the same as the special electric accessory process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  When it is determined in S2158 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2158), the process proceeds to S2164. Here, as a case where it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the round, or during the big prize closing process described later (during the first big prize opening closing process or 2 major winning prize closing process). In S2164, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening / closing operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the predetermined large winning opening opening pattern started in S2160 is being executed (during round) (S2164). If it is determined in S2164 that the winning prize opening / closing operation is being executed (during a round) (YES in S2164), it is next determined whether or not the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2165). If it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is not satisfied (NO in S2165), the process ends. The round end condition is the same as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2165), a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2166), and the process proceeds to S2167. In S2166, a round end command capable of specifying a round to be ended is set, such as “1R end command” for the end of the first round, and “2R end command” for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201.

  If it is determined in S2164 that the winning prize opening / closing operation is not being executed (during round) (NO in S2164), the process proceeds to S2170. In S2167, it is determined whether or not the first big prize opening opening round has ended, that is, whether or not the big winning opening opened in the completed round is the first big winning opening 30 (S2167). If it is determined in S2167 that the grand prize opening opened in the completed round is the first grand prize opening (YES in S2167), the big prize opening closing process related to the first grand prize opening (that is, the first grand prize winning) In order to execute the mouth closing process (S2156), the first closing process flag is turned ON (S2168), and the process proceeds to S2170. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2167 that the grand prize opening opened in the finished round is not the first big prize opening, that is, the grand prize opening opened in the finished round is the second big prize opening (in S2167 NO), the second closing process flag is set to ON (S2169) to execute the closing process for the second winning prize opening (that is, the second closing process for closing the winning opening (S2157)). Transition. In S2170, a round counter subtraction process described later is performed (S2170), and the process ends.

[First Grand Prize Closure Processing]
Next, the first big prize opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process” or “first confirmation process”) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the big prize opening closing process related to either the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is performed as the big prize opening closing process. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the second grand prize opening can be opened during the first grand prize opening closing process, and the first big prize opening is opened during the second big prize opening closing process. Operation is possible. Therefore, in the special winning opening closing process of the second embodiment, depending on the situation, the first special winning opening closing process and the second winning prize closing process may be executed in parallel. It has become.

  In the first big prize opening closing process (S2156), first, in S3001, it is determined whether or not the first closing process flag is ON (S3001), and if it is determined that the first closing process flag is not ON (NO in S3001), The process ends without performing the big prize opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the first closing process flag is ON (YES in S3001), it is then determined whether it is the start time of the interval period (S3002). If it is determined in S3002 that it is the start time of the interval period (YES in S3002), the interval period (measurement) is started (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3004. If it is determined in S3002 that it is not the start time of the interval period, that is, the interval period is already being executed (measured) (NO in S3002), the process proceeds to S3004.

  In S3004, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the interval period (S3004). If it is determined that it is the end time of the interval period (YES in S3004), the first closing process flag is turned OFF (S3005), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that it is not the end time of the interval period, that is, the interval period is still being executed (measurement in progress) (NO in S3004), the first grand prize opening closing process is not completed. Finish the process (without completing it). Here, the first grand prize opening 30 does not include the specific area 39 (specific area detection sensor 39a) or the movable piece 150 that changes the possibility of guiding the game ball to the specific area. Or the first grand prize port sensor 30a for detecting discharge). For this reason, the possibility of clogging of balls inside the special winning opening is low, and processing such as error notification based on the incoming / outgoing number coincidence determination process, retry operation, and incoming / outgoing number mismatch determination process is not executed. That is, in the big prize opening closing process (first big prize opening closing process) relating to the round for opening the first big prize opening 30, the interval period setting process is performed, and the big prize relating to the round for opening the second big prize opening 35 is performed. It is assumed that no other large winning opening closing process that can be executed in the winning opening closing process (second large winning opening closing process) is executed. Note that the first big winning opening 30 may also be provided with a sensor for detecting a pitch and a sensor for detecting a discharge.

[Second Grand Prize Closure Processing]
Next, the second big prize opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process” or “second confirmation process”) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Inside the second grand prize opening 35, a second big prize opening sensor that detects a game ball entering the second big prize opening 35, and detection of discharge of the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 is detected. The non-specific area sensor 49a, the specific area sensor 39a, and the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 are guided to either the non-specific area (non-specific area sensor 49a) or the specific area (specific area sensor 39a). The movable piece 150 is provided. Therefore, since the round that opens the second grand prize opening, particularly the round that opens the second big prize opening and operates the movable piece 150 in a predetermined mode, the possibility of occurrence of ball clogging or the like increases. In the second big prize opening closing process related to the round, a process (confirmation process) different from the first big prize opening closing process is executed.

  Specifically, in the second big prize opening closing process (S2157), first, it is determined whether or not the second closing process flag is ON (S3051), and when it is determined that the second closing process flag is not ON (NO in S3051). The process ends without performing the big prize opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the second closing process flag is ON (YES in S3051), it is then determined whether it is the start time of the interval period (S3052). If it is determined in S3052 that it is the start time of the interval period (YES in S3052), the interval period (measurement) is started (S3053), and the process proceeds to S3054. If it is determined in S3052 that it is not the start time of the interval period (NO in S3052), the process proceeds to S3054. Here, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the interval period, the interval period is already being executed (measured), the interval period has ended and before the retry operation has been executed, or the retry operation has been executed. It is possible to include a case where the error notification is being executed, a case where the error notification is being executed after the retry operation is completed, and a case where the error notification is being executed.

  In S3054, it is determined whether the interval period has ended (S3054), and if it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is still being executed (measurement in progress) (NO in S3054), processing Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S3054), the process proceeds to S3055. Since the processing from S3055 to S3059 is the same as the processing from S2705 to S2709 of the special winning opening closing process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

[I / O number match judgment processing]
Next, the input / output number match determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, the winning / ejecting number coincidence determination process (S3059) is not performed in the first big prize opening closing process, but only in the second big prize opening closing process. Therefore, the closing process flag that is turned OFF in S2854 and S2862 is the second closing process flag. This corresponds to the processes of S2804 and S2812 of the input / output number coincidence determination process (S2708) of the first embodiment. Since the other processes of the input / output number coincidence determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

[Round counter subtraction processing]
Next, the round counter subtraction process (S2170) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed after the round end condition is satisfied, that is, after all the opening operations in the round are completed. And if this process has completed the 1st grand prize opening closing process concerning the round which opens the previous 1st grand prize opening, execution of the round which opens the next 1st big prize opening is enabled. . Conversely, if the first grand prize opening closing process related to the round that opens the previous first big prize opening is not completed, the execution (start) of the next round of opening the first big prize opening is impossible. It is said. Similarly, if the second grand prize opening closing process relating to the round in which the previous second big prize opening is opened is completed, the next round of opening the second big prize opening can be executed. Conversely, if the second grand prize opening closing process related to the round that opens the previous second big prize opening has not been completed, the execution (start) of the next round of opening the second big prize opening is impossible. It is said.

  Accordingly, for example, the second grand prize opening closing process related to the round (for example, the second round) for opening the second grand prize opening and the next round (for example, the third round) for opening the first grand prize opening. The opening operation can be executed in parallel. However, a second round (for example, four rounds) for opening the second grand prize opening will not be completed unless the second grand prize opening closing process related to the round for opening the second big prize opening (for example, the second round) is completed. Eye). In addition, although it is not set in the execution pattern of the round in the jackpot game of the present embodiment, if the next round (for example, the fourth round) described above is a round that opens the first grand prize opening, The next round (for example, the fourth round) may be executed (started) on the condition that the first grand prize opening closing process of the third round) is completed. Of course, it does not matter which of the big winning openings is open, and it may not be shifted to the next round. That is, only one round may be executed in parallel with the predetermined big prize closing process.

  Specifically, in the round counter subtraction process (S2170), first, it is determined whether or not the next round is a round that opens the first big prize opening (S2901). If it is determined in S2901 that the next round is a round that opens the first prize winning opening (YES in S2901), it is then determined whether or not the first closing process flag is OFF (S2902). If it is determined that the closing process flag is not OFF, that is, the first big prize opening closing process has not yet been completed (NO in S2902), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the first closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2902), the process proceeds to S2907.

  If it is determined in S2901 that the next round is not a round that opens the first grand prize opening (NO in S2901), then it is determined whether or not the next round is a round that opens the second big prize opening ( S2903). If it is determined in S2903 that the next round is a round that opens the second grand prize opening (YES in S2903), it is then determined whether or not the second closing process flag is OFF (S2904). If it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2904), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2904 that the second closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2904), the process proceeds to S2907.

  Here, in S2904, as a case where it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF, that is, the second big prize opening closing process is not completed, the round ended this time is a round that opens the second big prize opening. There may be a case where the second big prize opening closing process has not yet been completed. That is, this is a case where rounds of opening the second grand prize opening are continuously performed. Next, although the round ended this time is a round in which the first grand prize opening is opened, the second big prize opening closing process related to the round in which the second grand prize opening is opened is not completed. Cases can be mentioned.

  This is because, in the second grand prize opening closing process related to the round in which the previous second big prize opening is opened, the number of balls entered and the number of discharges are judged to be inconsistent in the number of winning / discharging coincidence determination process, and the retry operation process (It is also referred to as “movable member operation process”) or a retry operation is performed, but it is not determined that they match and an error notification process is performed. In such a case, it is assumed that the next round (opening operation) for opening the second big prize opening is not executed (not started) until the second big prize opening closing process is completed. In addition, when it does not become a coincidence determination even if it repeats a predetermined period coincidence determination process, a 2nd big prize opening closing process shall be completed based on progress of a predetermined error alerting | reporting period.

  In S2903, if it is determined that the next round is not a round for opening the second grand prize opening, that is, the final round in the big hit game (NO in S2903), then whether or not the first closing process flag is OFF is determined. Determination is made (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the first closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2905), it is then determined whether the second closing process flag is OFF (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the second closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2906), the process proceeds to S2907. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the first closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2905), and if it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2906), the process ends. That is, when all the opening operations of the final round are finished, it is confirmed that both the first big prize opening closing process and the second big prize opening closing process are completed, and the process proceeds to S2907. Note that the processing of S2907 to S2911 is the same as the processing of S2117 to S2121 of the special electric accessory processing of the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

[Timing chart]
FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing an embodiment of a predetermined round in the jackpot game according to the second embodiment. In this timing chart, for the sake of convenience, the number of balls entered and the number of discharges do not match in the input / output number matching process of the second big prize opening closing process related to the second round, and then the predetermined number of times of the match determination process is repeatedly executed. However, they do not coincide with each other, a retry operation is performed, and an error notification is shown. And while the second grand prize opening closing process is being executed, in parallel with the second big prize opening closing process, the first grand prize opening which is a grand prize opening different from the second round is opened three rounds. The aspect which performs an eye is shown.

  As shown in this timing chart, in the second embodiment, the second grand prize opening closing process related to the previous round, that is, the interval period setting process, the retry operation process, the error notification process, and the interval between them are set. The waiting period and the next round (third round) opening operation can be executed in parallel. In the second embodiment, in addition to this, the operation of the movable piece 150 of the previous round (second round) (opening / closing operation of the specific area) and the opening operation of the next round (third round) are performed in parallel. And make it executable.

  In addition, the opening operation of the previous round and the opening operation of the subsequent round (the opening operation of the first big prize opening and the opening operation of the second big prize opening) are controlled so as not to be executed redundantly. However, as shown in FIG. 60, depending on the situation, the operation of the movable piece 150 (opening / closing operation of the specific region) is continued even after all the opening operations of the previous round (second round) are completed (FIG. 60). 2000 ms shown in 60). Further, the specific area sensor 39a is also set as an effective period as an extra period in the continuation period and a predetermined period after the end of the continuation period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60). That is, the validity period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) of the second grand prize port in the previous round and the game ball detection sensor (first grand prize port sensor 30a) of the first grand prize port in the next round The validity period of may overlap. It should be noted that “the specific area sensor 39a is also set to the effective period for the continuation period and the predetermined period after the end of the continuous period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60)”, but similarly, the non-specific area sensor 49a is also the effective period. It is said that. Since the second big prize opening 35 is not entered after the completion of all the opening operations, the second big prize opening sensor 35a may be set as an invalid period or may be set as an effective period. In addition, the valid period or invalid period is for whether or not the privilege grant at the time of passing through the specific area is valid or invalid, and the game ball detection function (discharge detection function) is from the start of the round. , At least until the end of the error notification period. As a result, even when a game ball is detected during the invalid period, it is possible to determine a match in the deposit / discharge number match determination process.

  In this way, the grand prize opening closing process related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round are executed in parallel, or the movement of the movable piece related to the previous round (opening / closing operation of a specific area) and the next The opening operation of the next round is executed in parallel, or the effective period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round are executed in parallel. Made it possible to do. This made it possible to start the next round quickly. In addition, when there is a discrepancy between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged in the winning prize closing process, etc., a match determination process, a retry operation process, and an error notification process are repeatedly performed in parallel with the next round. Thus, the big hit game can be executed quickly and smoothly without stagnation of the progress of the round. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, the input / output number coincidence determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. Therefore, when the number of input / output is the same, an unnecessary operation is not performed. Then, it becomes possible to complete the big prize closing process.

  Next, Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment is different from the other embodiments in the process related to the execution of the VS chance effect (specific effect). Below, a different part with respect to the content demonstrated in Example 1 is mainly demonstrated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, there are four types of confrontation A to D with respect to the confrontation effect (confrontation scene) in the VS chance effect. It was decided when the chance production started. That is, the content of the confrontation effect (confrontation effect pattern) performed during the VS chance effect is determined based on the specific effect pattern selected and set in the process of S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. It was. Then, in accordance with the V passing effect designation command or V non-passing effect designation command received in S4418 or S4420 of the received command analysis process (S4301) shown in FIG. It was a thing. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, which of the confrontations A to D is to be executed is not determined when the VS chance effect is started, but at the second round of the 7R big hit game, that is, at the timing when the V round ends. In addition to determining which of confrontation A to D is to be executed, it is also determined whether the confrontation effect to be executed is the victory pattern of the ally character (friendly character victory effect) or the defeat pattern (friendly character defeat effect) It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, in the third embodiment, first, in S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. 46, the effects constituting the VS chance effect, that is, “introduction effect”, “selection effect”, and “confrontation effect”. Among them, the effect patterns of “introduction effects 1 to 3” shown in FIGS. 53B to 53D and “selection effect 1” shown in FIG. 53E are set. Thereafter, a specific effect start command for starting the VS chance effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4605), and the set specific effect start command is transmitted by the command transmission process (S4006). When transmitted to the image control board 100, the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Thereafter, until the second round of the 7R jackpot game ends, the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (c) to 53 (e) (introduction effect 2 to selection effect 1) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done. When the second round of the 7R jackpot game ends, it is determined which of the confrontation effects to be executed this time is confrontation AD, and the confrontation that is determined is selected as shown in FIG. 53 (f). After showing as a result (selection effect 2), a confrontation effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIGS. 54 (g) to (h1) and (h2)). The determination and execution of the confrontation effect is realized by the received command analysis process of the second embodiment performed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub control unit 90). The received command analysis process according to the third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that the received command analysis process of the third embodiment is the same as the received command analysis process (S4301) of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. Since the processing is replaced and S4395 to S4411 in FIG. 43 and S4412, S4413, and S4414 to S4416 in FIG. 44 are the same in the third embodiment, description thereof is omitted here. In FIG. 61, the same step numbers as in the first embodiment are assigned to the processing contents common to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the received command analysis process of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not a round end command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4450), and when it is determined that it has not been received (NO in S4450). ), The process proceeds to the process of S4414, and if it is determined that it has been received (YES in S4450), it is determined whether or not the number of completed rounds is 2 (S4451). The round end command sent from the main control board 80 includes information that can specify the number of rounds to be ended (end round) in the same manner as the round start command described above. The effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of end rounds based on the received round end command. If it is determined that the finished round is not two rounds (NO in S4451), the present process is terminated. Here, in the third embodiment, when a round end command is received from the main control board 80, a command indicating how many rounds have been finished is transmitted to the image control board 100 in response to this. Is not configured. This is because the CPU of the image control board 100 can specify the current number of rounds by sending a round designation command to the image control board 100 by at least the processing of S4415 regardless of the type of jackpot. This is because it is possible to grasp the progress of the game or execute the effect when performing the effect according to the progress of the jackpot game. Of course, as in the case of receiving the round start command from the main control board 80, based on the reception of the round end command, a command for designating the number of end rounds is transmitted to the image control board 100, and an effect display or the like corresponding thereto is displayed. You may make it perform.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S4451 that the finished round is 2 rounds (YES in S4451), it is determined whether or not the V passing flag is ON (S4452), and it is determined that it is ON (YES in S4452), it means that the game ball has passed the specific area 39 (V pass) in the V round, so a table for determining the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the passage (V pass confrontation effect pattern determination table) Is set (S4453), the V passing flag is turned OFF (S4454), and the process proceeds to S4455. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4452 that the V passing flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S4452), the game ball has not passed the specific area 39 in the V round (V not passed). Therefore, a table (V non-passing confrontation effect pattern determination table) is set to determine the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the non-passing (S4457), and the process proceeds to S4455. In the third embodiment, since a confrontation effect determination random number (random number range: 0 to 99) is provided as various effect determination random numbers acquired in S4501 of FIG. 45, in S4455, confrontation acquired in S4501 Based on the effect determination random number and the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, a confrontation effect pattern corresponding to V passing or V non-passing is selected and set (S4455).

  Here, the confrontation effect pattern determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, the confrontation effect pattern determination table includes a V passing table and a V non-passing table. In each table, each of confrontation A to D and a confrontation effect determining random value are determined. The association is defined. Each production pattern of confrontation A to D corresponding to the V passage has become a teammate character victory (victory pattern) from the start to the end (end) of the confrontation scene. Each production pattern of the corresponding confrontation A to D is such that the production mode from the start to the end (end) of the confrontation scene is a teammate character defeat (defeat pattern). In the third embodiment, the selection rates (appearance rates) are different between the confrontations A to D corresponding to V passage and the confrontations A to D corresponding to V non-passing. Specifically, the confrontation effect pattern selected in the case of passing V has the highest confrontation D selection rate (50%), and the following confrontation C (30%), confrontation B (15%), confrontation A The selectivity is lower in the order of (5%). On the other hand, the confrontation effect pattern selected when V does not pass is the highest confrontation A selection rate (50%), and hereinafter, confrontation B (30%), confrontation C (15%), confrontation D (5 %) In order of decreasing. Thereby, for example, when the confrontation D is selected as the confrontation effect pattern and the confrontation effect of the confrontation D is executed on the display screen 7a, the possibility of passing V becomes high, and the confrontation A is selected as the confrontation effect pattern. Depending on the type of the confrontation effect, such as when the confrontation effect of the confrontation A is executed on the display screen 7a, the game state after the big hit game is “probable game state ( The probability of becoming “probability change mode” ”, that is, the reliability (expected degree) of probability change (V passing) can be varied. In the third embodiment, all of the production patterns of the confrontations A to D have different selectivities in the case of V passage and in the case of no V passage, but in the case of V passage and V non-passage. Those having the same selection rate as in the above case may be included in the confrontation effect pattern determination table. If this is the case, it is highly likely that the player has a high or low possibility of passing the V at this big hit, that is, the game state after the big hit game is likely to become a “probability change game state (probability change mode)”. It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to guess whether it is low.

  In S4455, a confrontation effect pattern according to the value of the confrontation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 is selected from the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, and the selected confrontation effect pattern is set. . Next, in S4456, a confrontation effect designation command indicating the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4456). When the set confrontation effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 confronts the confrontation effect (confrontation) specified based on the received confrontation effect designation command. Any one of A to D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a confrontation effect to be executed this time. At this time, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the selection effect 1 (roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53 (e) to the selection effect 2 (result display of the roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53 (f). . The switching display from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 is performed after the end of the second round and until the start of the third round, that is, in an interval period between the second and third rounds.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the start of the third round (YES in S4414 → YES in S4415 → YES in S4416), a confrontation effect start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in S4458 (S4458). When the set confrontation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 indicates the selection effect 2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The type of the confrontation effect (any one of confrontation AD), that is, the confrontation scene based on the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 described above is displayed (see FIG. 54). Thereafter, the CPU of the image control board 100 receives various commands such as a round start command and a round end command from the sub-control board 90, and until the current jackpot game (7R jackpot game) ends, that is, the final round. By the time, is finished, the end of the confrontation effect based on the current confrontation effect pattern (a teammate character victory effect or a teammate character defeat effect) is displayed.

  In the configuration of the third embodiment, after the result of the V round, that is, V passing or V non-passing in the V round is determined, the confrontation effect (confrontation) performed in the VS chance effect is based on the result. Since the effect pattern (any one of the confrontations A to D) of the scene is determined, it is possible to set the reliability of the probability change (V passing) in the confrontation effect. Thereby, before the end of the V round, a plurality of production patterns (confrontation A to D) of confrontation effects that can be selected are displayed on the display screen 7a, so that a highly reliable confrontation effect is selected. It is possible to beat the player's expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the VS chance effect is performed, particularly the game entertainment from the selection effect to the confrontation effect.

  In Example 3, the selection (decision) of the confrontation effect pattern is performed between 2 rounds and 3 rounds (interval period) after 2 rounds (V round) of 7R jackpot game is completed. However, the timing for selecting the confrontation effect pattern is not limited to this. That is, it is possible to appropriately select the confrontation effect pattern at least after the result of V round (V pass / V non-pass) is confirmed. Specifically, in the above-described first embodiment, the movable piece 150 is in an operating state for 80 ms after 80 ms from the first opening of the V-attacker (starting opening of 16000 ms) in the V round (2 rounds) at the estimated V passing jackpot. The specific area is opened, and then the non-operating state (specific area is closed) and then the operating state (specific area is opened) is set again. For example, the operation state of the movable piece 150 is set to an operation state (specific area release) 80 ms after the first opening of the V-attacker (opening of 16000 ms), and the state is maintained for 5000 ms and the non-operating state after 5000 ms ( If the operation state is not changed thereafter, the operation control of the movable piece 150 is completed before the first release of the V attacker (16000 ms release), and the game ball is specified thereafter. The possibility of passing through region 39 is eliminated. In this case, before the V round (2 rounds) is completed, the result of the V round (V pass / V non pass) is confirmed, and the time from the confirmed time to the start of the next round is related to the determination and selection of the confrontation effect pattern. It can be used as the execution time of the production (selection production). Alternatively, a confrontation effect pattern is selected (decided) in any one of the remaining rounds after the end of the second round (V round) except for the final round (7 rounds in the embodiment), and the selection is made. It is also possible to perform an effect based on the (determination) result (an effect indicating the selection result, a confrontation effect based on the selection result (result notification effect), etc.).

  Moreover, you may provide the case where the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes the specific area 39 in the V round. Even in this case, the result of the V round (V pass / V non pass) is confirmed before the V round (2 rounds) is completed, and the time from the confirmed time to the start of the next round is determined or selected as a confrontation effect pattern. It can be used as the execution time of an effect (for example, a selection effect) according to the above. In addition, when the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball has passed the specific area 39, the confrontation effect pattern is selected earlier or later depending on the passage timing. It is also possible to change the production mode of the production (selection production) related to the determination and selection of the production pattern. By doing so, for example, in the case of passing V, before the result of the selection effect (selection effect 2) is displayed or the result of the selection effect (selection effect 2) is displayed at an earlier timing than in the case of non-passing V. It is possible to provide an effect mode that suggests V passing confirmation in advance, such as performing a notice effect indicating V passing confirmation at the stage. It is desirable to set such an effect mode as a so-called “premier effect”. Regarding these “timing of selection (decision) of the confrontation effect pattern”, any one timing may be fixedly set, or a random lottery or a big hit triggered by a big win or a big hit game start, etc. You may comprise so that the timing of selection (determination) may be determined each time based on various conditions, such as the kind of symbol.

  As mentioned above, although Example 1-3 has been demonstrated, this invention is not limited to this. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the aspect of the symbol confirmation effect (fourth effect) when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed (determined display) during execution of the VS chance (introduction effect) related to the 7R jackpot, The display size is made smaller than usual and displayed in the corner of the display screen 7a, the fixed display time is set to a short time (500 ms), and the fixed display time elapses (the transition from the introduction effect 2 to the introduction effect 3). Although it is difficult to recognize the symbol confirmation effect by deleting the effect symbol 8 from the display screen 7a, the aspect of making the symbol confirmation effect difficult to recognize is not limited to the embodiment. . For example, the final display time of the production symbol 8 is further shortened, the color of the production symbol 8 is made lighter or translucent than usual, the number of digits (number) of the production symbol 8 is reduced, or the production symbol 8 It is difficult to recognize the symbol confirmation effect depending on the elements such as the display size, the fixed display time, the display position, the type, the content, the shape, etc. It is possible to set it as an aspect.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned Example, except for the effect scene (selection effect 2) which shows the selection result of confrontation AD about the effect pattern of "introduction effect" and "selection effect" which comprises VS chance effect (specific effect). Although it has been described that there is only one effect pattern, a plurality of effect patterns are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 for the “introduction effect” and the “selection effect”, and image data related thereto is stored in the image control board. 100 ROMs (image ROMs) are stored, and at the start of the VS chance effect, one or both of the “introduction effect” and “selection effect” effect patterns are selected, and the selected effect pattern The “introduction effect” and the “selection effect” may be performed based on the above. For example, depending on the effect pattern, the character image appearing in the introduction effect may be different, the background image of the introduction effect or the selection effect may be different, or the aspect of the selection effect may be different (for example, roulette effect or dart effect). It is possible to provide a production pattern. This makes it possible to diversify specific effects. Further, regarding the “confrontation effect” that constitutes the VS chance effect (specific effect), in the above-described embodiment, the confrontation effect (confrontation scene) is started at the start of the third round. It is not necessary to start the confrontation effect with the start. For example, the selection effect may be performed after the third round is started, and then the confrontation effect may be started. That is, the start timing of the confrontation effect may be a predetermined time after the result of the previous V round is confirmed. In the above-described embodiment, the start of the third round and before the end of the seventh round. It may be a predetermined time.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second grand prize winning opening is made by one round and two rounds (V round) of “7R fourth big hit” and one round of “7R fifth big hit”. The opening / closing operation of 35 (V Attacker) is the same, and by making the player recognize these rounds as one “chance round”, when the chance round starts, “7R 4th big hit” and “7R It is configured such that it is difficult for the player to determine which of the “fifth big hit” has occurred. And in 7R 4th big hit, when the interval period that reaches after the second opening of the V attacker ends, it advances to 3 rounds, whereas in 7R 5th big hit, the interval that comes through the second and subsequent opening of the V attacker At the end of the period, the process proceeds to 2 rounds (V rounds), and after a short period (100 ms) of V attackers are released in that round, the process proceeds to 3 rounds (see FIG. 49). For this reason, until the end of the “chance round”, the opening / closing operation mode of the V-attacker is the same for “7R 4 big hits” and “7R 5 big hits”. Are slightly different in the opening / closing operation mode of the V-attacker, and the opening / closing operation modes of the 1-round and 2-round V-attackers are not completely the same.

  On the other hand, “7R 4th big hit” and “7R 5th big hit” make the opening / closing operation mode of the 1st and 2nd rounds of the V-attacker completely match, so that “7R 4th big hit” and 7R 5th It is also possible to make it more difficult to determine “big hit”. Specifically, for example, in the opening pattern shown in FIG. 49, the final opening of the V attacker of the second round of “7R fourth big hit” is 100 ms (0.1 seconds) opening time (instantaneous opening and closing). The final opening of V Attacker in the first round of “7R 5th big hit” is performed in 100 ms (0.1 second) opening time (instantaneous opening and closing) as one opening in the second round. It is possible to make the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker completely coincide. This makes it very difficult to determine whether “7R fourth big hit” or “7R fifth big hit” has occurred through the opening / closing operation mode of the V-attacker. Even in this case, the VS chance effect (specific effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as in the above-described embodiment until the second round is completed (until the start of the third round). Thus, even through the effect display, it is difficult to determine which of “7R fourth big hit” or “7R fifth big hit” has occurred. As a result, at least until the second round is completed (until the third round is started), it is extremely difficult to determine (disregard) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence / absence of passage, etc. It becomes.

  However, as in the embodiment described above, the opening / closing operation mode of the 1st and 2nd rounds of the V-attacker is not completely matched between “7R 4th big hit” and “7R 5th big hit”. The opening and closing behavior of the V-attacker when proceeding to is slightly different, so it is difficult to determine whether "7R fourth big hit" or "7R fifth big hit" has occurred, but the third round starts from the end of the chance round By gazing at the opening / closing operation mode of the V-attacker, the determination can be made once. By leaving such a room for discrimination, it is difficult to discriminate the type of 7R jackpot and whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area 39, but it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of seeing it. It becomes. In addition, regarding the coincidence / non-coincidence of the opening / closing operation modes of the 1-round and 2-round V-attackers, not only the 7R big hit, but also the “12R second and third big hits” and “2R seventh and eighth big hits” in the above-described embodiments. This is the same for “the expected V pass big hit” and “the V non-passed big hit” having the same number of rounds.

  In the above-described embodiment, the big hit and miss are provided as a result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is successful, but in addition to this, a “small hit” may be provided. However, in the case of opening a big prize opening in a special game related to a small hit (small hit game), the opening time is not a long time (for example, 30 seconds) like a big hit but a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds). . When such a small hit is provided, for example, a “2R big hit” is provided as a hit to open the big prize opening twice in 0.9 seconds, and distinction between “small hit” and “2R big hit” (discrimination) It is possible to obtain a so-called “latency probability change” gameability by making the 2R big hit the aforementioned “V passing expected big hit (probability big hit)”. In addition, when performing a small hit game in which the second big winning opening 35 is opened, the movable piece 150 is not operated during the small hit game. That is, during the small hit game, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39, and a high probability state is not given based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effective period of the specific area 39 is set to a period during which the specific area opening / closing operation pattern is being executed and the specific area is in an open state, and 1000 ms after the open state is closed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the execution of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, all may be set to the effective period, or during the execution of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern, the period after the first open state is all effective period In addition to these, a predetermined period after the end of the specific area opening / closing operation pattern may be set as the effective period.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, except for 15R jackpot, the V-attackers of the first to second rounds of the jackpot game related to the V passing expected jackpot (12R second jackpot, 7R fourth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot) ( Round 1 of the big hit game related to the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35) (including the interval period between rounds) and the big hit that will not pass V (12R third big hit, 7R fifth big hit, 2R eighth big hit) The open pattern of the V attacker is the same pattern, and the appearance is difficult to distinguish between the first and second rounds of the expected V passing jackpot and the first round of the expected V passing jackpot. In other words, just looking at the opening / closing operation of the V-attacker when the chance round is started, whether the chance round is due to the V passing big hit (for example, the 7R fourth big hit) or the V non-passing big hit (for example, the 7R first big hit) It was difficult to determine whether it was due to 5 big hits). Regarding the number of rounds constituting this chance round, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the first round and the second round were set as two chance rounds, but the number of rounds is limited to 2 rounds such as 3 rounds and 4 rounds. It is not a thing. For example, the rounds that make up the chance round are 3 rounds from the 1st round to the 3rd round, and the 2nd round is the V round (specific round), but the V attackers open the 1st and 3rd rounds. It is good also as a round (non-specific round) in which the movable piece 150 does not operate. In this case, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the V round (second round) of the V passing expected big hit (for example, the 7R fourth big hit) is set as a pattern having a high possibility of entering a game ball (a pattern that is easy to enter). , V opener of the V round (2nd round) of V unscheduled big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit) is a pattern with a low possibility of entering a game ball (pattern difficult to enter), The V attacker release pattern (opening / closing operation mode) for the first to third rounds of the expected V passing jackpot and the V attacker release pattern (first and third rounds of the expected V hitting jackpot) The opening pattern of the V-attacker for the first and third rounds of both big hits may be set so that the opening / closing operation mode is the same. In other words, there is a difference in the V attacker's opening time in the V round between the V passing big hit (eg 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passing big hit (eg 7R fifth big hit). Rounds are used to match the open pattern of the V attacker's release pattern so that the jackpot V attacker's release pattern of both hits matches. The opening pattern of the V attacker according to such a configuration (Modification 1) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 63 shows the V-attacker opening operation from the first round to the third round according to the modified example 1 of “7R fourth big hit” as V planned big hit and “7R fifth big hit” as V non-passed big hit ( Open pattern). In the first modification, for both “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit”, the opening pattern of the V attackers in the first and second rounds is “7R fourth big hit” and “ Although it is the same as “7R 5th big hit”, the third round is different from the embodiment described above. In the above-described embodiment, the first prize opening 30 is the first prize opening 30 that is opened in the third round. However, in the first modified example, the V attacker (the second prize opening 35) is used instead of the first prize opening 30. The third round is a non-specific round (a round in which the movable piece 15 does not operate). The third round V Attacker opening pattern of “7R 4th big hit” is the 3rd round with the V attacker short opening (100ms) of the 2nd round of “7R 5th big hit” and the interval period (2000ms). The pattern is such that the eye V-attacker is opened and the opening operation is similar. That is, the first V-attacker release in the third round of “7R 4th big hit” is performed in the same manner as the V attacker release of the second round of “7R 5th big hit”, and 3 rounds of “7R 4th big hit” It is assumed that the second and subsequent V-attacker opening is performed in the same manner as the third-round V-attacker opening of “7R fifth big hit”. In the first modification, the third-round V-attacker opening of “7R fifth big hit” is the same mode as the second round V-attacker opening of “7R fourth big hit” (same as the previous embodiment). It is supposed to be done in That is, after opening the V attacker until 16000 ms (16 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the round, a 1000 ms (1 second) closing is sandwiched between each opening, and 1000 ms (1 second) opening once, One opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in this order.

  According to the first modification, it is possible to completely match the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker from the start of the first round to the end of the third round in the “7R fourth big hit” and the “7R fifth big hit”. This makes it impossible to visually determine whether “7R fourth big hit” or “7R fifth big hit” has occurred through the opening / closing operation of the V attacker. Further, in the first modification, until the third round is completed, the specific effect (VS chance effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as in the above-described embodiment, so that the effect display can be performed. It becomes difficult (impossible) to determine which one of “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit” has occurred. In the case of performing the above-described specific effect (VS chance effect) in the first modification, for example, if the 7R fourth big hit, the timing of the second V attacker opening start in the third round, if the 7R fifth big hit, 3 rounds The control (display control) for advancing the specific effect may be performed so that the start of the eyes (at the timing of the first V-attacker opening start, the confrontation effect (result notification effect) shown in FIG. 54 is started). Thus, also in the first modification, it is possible to increase the difficulty (difficulty) of determining the 7R jackpot type from both sides of the opening / closing operation mode and the effect display mode of the V attacker, and the result notification of at least the third round Before the result of the previous V round (chance round) is shown by the performance, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence / absence of passage, etc. are determined (disregarded). It is, becomes extremely difficult (virtually impossible).

  In the first modification, the second and subsequent V-attacker release patterns in the third round of “7R fourth big hit” and the third round V-attacker release pattern of “7R fifth big hit” are as described above. It is not limited, and the mode is not particularly limited as long as it becomes difficult to determine the type of jackpot (substantially impossible). In addition, in the “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit” of the modified example 1, the round game after the fourth round may be, for example, the round game after the third round of the above-described embodiment, Or you may perform the round game after the 4th round of the Example mentioned above.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 63, the first and third rounds before and after the second round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, the V passing expected big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and V non-passing The opening / closing operation of the V-attacker for the 1st to 3rd rounds was matched with the planned big hit (for example, 7R 5th big hit), but not the 3rd round of the 1st to 3rd rounds, but the 1st round It is also possible to make the mode of the opening / closing operation of the V attacker match by using two rounds of (non-specific round) and second round (V round). That is, even when the first opening (100 ms opening) in the third round of the 7R fourth big hit shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed as the final opening of the second round, the mode of the opening / closing operation of the V attacker is reduced. It is possible to match. Specifically, the 100 ms release existing after the last 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed as the second round instead of the third round. In this case, the interval between the second and third rounds shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is the closing time of the V attacker in the second round, and the closing time of 2000 ms in the third round of the upper part of the figure is the interval. . In this way, when the V round is the second round, the first to third rounds depend on the setting pattern (combination) of the V attacker's release pattern in the second specific round and the subsequent non-specific rounds. In addition to the eyes, also in the first to second rounds, the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker is matched between the expected V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the planned V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit). It becomes possible. By matching the opening / closing operation mode of the V attackers in the first and second rounds, the first round winning opening 30 can be used in the third round instead of the V attackers. It is possible to widen the design range of the round game while ensuring that it is difficult to determine the jackpot type based on it.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second round including the modification 1 is the V round. However, the round to be the V round is not limited to the second round, and the round is the V round. There is no particular question. It is difficult to determine whether a V hitting big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) or a V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit) has occurred from the opening / closing operation (opening pattern) of the V attacker. If it is possible (substantially impossible), any number of rounds may be V rounds. In other words, a configuration in which a non-specific round exists before a specific round (V round), a configuration in which a non-specific round exists after a specific round (V round), or a specific round (V Various configurations such as a configuration in which a non-specific round exists before and after a round) can be adopted. Specifically, for example, the third round may be a V round, or the first round may be a V round. If the third round is the V round, for example, the V attacker release of the first and second rounds of “7R fourth big hit” in the above-described embodiment is performed in a short time (for example, 100 ms), and the third round The V-attacker opening may be performed in the same manner as in the second round of the 7R fourth big hit in the embodiment described above. Then, in the same manner as the opening / closing operation of the V attacker in the first to third rounds, the opening / closing operation of the V attacker in the first to third rounds of “7R fifth big hit” may be performed. Moreover, what is necessary is just to perform the specific effect (VS chance effect) similar to the Example mentioned above until the end of the 3rd round. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiment.

  Alternatively, when the first round is a V round, as in the first modification described above, one round starts with a V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and a V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit). It is possible to completely discriminate the type of jackpot that has occurred by completely matching the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker until the end of the third round. The opening pattern of the V attacker according to such a configuration (Modification 2) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 64 shows the V-attacker opening operation from the first round to the third round in the modified example 2 of “7R fourth big hit” as V planned big hit and “7R fifth big hit” as V non-passed big hit ( Open pattern). Here, in the second modification, the first round of the jackpot game is the V round (specific round), the second round and the third round are non-specific rounds, and the opening of the V attacker in the first round (the first release) The start of the operation control of the movable piece 150 is triggered. The operation control of the movable piece 15 (the operation pattern of the movable piece 150) is the same as in the above-described embodiment. That is, when 80 ms has passed since the opening of the V-attacker for the first round (round start), the operation state is set to the non-operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned OFF) for 80 ms, and then the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned OFF. In this state, when 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) elapses, the operation state is again set (the movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on), and this state is maintained until a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds) elapses (see FIG. 50). reference).

  In addition, in the 7R fourth big hit (scheduled V pass big hit) of the second modified example, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 64, the V attacker is opened for 100 ms (0.1 second) from the start of the first round, and then After closing for 2000 ms (2 seconds), the V attacker is released for 16000 ms (16 seconds) (second opening). Thereafter, the opening / closing operation of the V attacker similar to the above-described embodiment, that is, after the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds), the opening of 1000 ms (1 second) is sandwiched between the opening of 1000 ms (1 second). One opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) are sequentially performed. As described above, in the second modification, the movable piece 150 is continuously in an operating state after 3000 ms (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the first round. For this reason, in the “V pass expected jackpot” of the modified example 2, 900 ms has elapsed after the second V attacker release (16000 ms release) in the first round is started, that is, after 16000 ms (16 seconds). For 15100 ms (about 15 seconds), the movable piece 150 is in an operating state (a specific area is open), and a game ball that has entered the V attacker can pass through the specific area 39. Also, after the end of the first round, in the second round, which is performed after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds), the V-attacker is released by 100 ms (0.1 seconds), and then an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds) is set. After that, the 3rd round V-attacker release is performed. The third round V-attacker opening (opening / closing operation) is performed in the same pattern as the second and subsequent opening / closing operations of the first round V-attacker.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 64, the 7R fifth big hit (the V non-passing expected big hit) of the second modified example has a V attacker in the first round which is the V round (the specific round in which the movable piece 150 operates). Open for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) and finish the first round. For this reason, in the first round (V round) of the jackpot not passing V, only the remaining 20 ms of the open time of the V attacker overlaps the operation period (operating state) of the movable piece 150, and the open time of 100 ms Not only is the possibility of entering the game ball into the open V-attacker very low, but the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is also extremely low. The opening pattern of the V-attacker in the first round is the same as the first V-attacker opening (opening / closing) in the first round of 7R fourth big hit. When the first round is completed, the V-attacker release for the second round is performed after an interval of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The opening pattern of the V attacker in the second round is the same as the second and subsequent V attacker opening (opening and closing) in the first round of 7R fourth big hit. For this reason, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the first round of the 7R fourth big hit is the same as the opening pattern of the first and second round V attackers in the 7R fifth big hit. When the second round is completed, the V attacker is released for the third round after an interval of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The release pattern of the V attacker in the third round is the same as the release pattern of the V attacker in the second to third rounds (including the interval period) of the 7R fourth big hit.

  In this way, in this second modification, as is clear from FIG. 64, “7R fourth big hit” as the V passing big hit and “7R fifth big hit” as the V non-passing big hit are one round. The mode (opening pattern) of the opening / closing operation of the V attacker from the start to the end of the third round is the same. As a result, in the second modification as well, as in the first modification described above, whether “7R fourth big hit” or “7R fifth big hit” has occurred is visually determined through the opening / closing operation of the V attacker. It becomes impossible. Also in the second modification example, until the third round is completed, the specific effect (VS chance effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as in the above-described embodiment, thereby providing the effect display. However, it is difficult to determine (substantially impossible) whether “7R fourth big hit” or “7R fifth big hit” has occurred. As a result, also in the second modification, when a 7R big hit occurs, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence / absence of passage, etc. until at least the third round is finished (until the chance round is finished) It is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to discriminate (see). In the second modification, the V attacker release pattern in the third round of “7R fourth big hit” and the second and subsequent V attacker release patterns in the third round of “7R fifth big hit” are as described above. It is not limited, and the mode is not particularly limited as long as it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot (substantially impossible). Further, the round games after the fourth round of “7R fourth big hit” and “7R fifth big hit” of the second modification can be dealt with in the same manner as in the first modification.

  In the second modification shown in FIG. 64, the second round and the third round following the first round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, and a V passing planned big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and a V non-passing scheduled The opening / closing operation of the V-attacker of the 1st to 3rd rounds was matched with the big hit (for example, 7R 5th big hit), but the first round (not the 3rd round of the 1st to 3rd rounds) It is also possible to match the mode of the opening / closing operation of the V attacker by using two rounds of the V round and the second round (non-specific round). In other words, even when the first opening (100 ms opening) in the third round of the fifth round of 7R shown in the lower part of FIG. It is possible to match. Specifically, the 100 ms release existing after the last 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is performed as the second round instead of the third round. In this case, the interval between the second and third rounds shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is the closing time of the V attacker in the second round, and the closing time of 2000 ms in the third round of the lower part of the figure is the interval. . As described above, when the V round is the first round, the first to third rounds depend on the setting pattern (combination) of the V attacker open pattern in the first specific round and the subsequent non-specific rounds. In addition to the eyes, also in the first to second rounds, the opening / closing operation mode of the V attacker is matched between the expected V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the planned V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit). It becomes possible. By matching the opening / closing operation mode of the V attackers in the first and second rounds, the first round winning opening 30 can be used in the third round instead of the V attackers. It is possible to widen the design range of the round game while ensuring that it is difficult to determine the jackpot type based on it.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for the V-attacker opening pattern (opening / closing operation mode), except for the 15R big hit, the big hit game related to the V passing expected big hit (12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 2R seventh big hit) The opening pattern for the second round and the opening pattern for the second and subsequent rounds in the first round of the jackpot game related to the V-passing expected jackpots (12R third jackpot, 7R fifth jackpot, 2R eighth jackpot) are all the same. I was trying. That is, all of the multiple V-attacker opening in the second round (V round) of the planned V passing jackpot and all of the second and subsequent times among the multiple opening of the V attacker in the first round of the planned non-passing jackpot And the same mode (see FIG. 49). However, it is not necessary for all of the V attacker releases to be the same. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the first V-attacker release in the second round of the expected V passing jackpot and the second V-attacker release in the first round of the expected V non-passing jackpot are 16000 ms (16 seconds). It was supposed to be performed once as an opening. Here, the launch performance (launch speed) of a game ball in a pachinko machine is generally designed so that one game ball can be launched in 600 ms (0.6 seconds) (100 per minute). Therefore, it is possible to launch 10 game balls in 6000 ms (6 seconds). For this reason, during the jackpot game, except for exceptions such as interruption of game ball launch and ball clogging, if the game ball is normally launched (right-handed in this example), it will be released during 16000 ms (16 seconds) release. , It is possible to enter 10 game balls, that is, a predetermined number of game balls as a round end condition, into the V attacker. Therefore, as long as the game ball is continuously being fired during the opening from the start of opening 16000 ms (16 seconds) of the V attacker, the round end condition may be satisfied during the opening and the possibility of proceeding to the next round may occur. Even if the round end condition is not satisfied during the release, it is highly likely that the round end condition is satisfied and the next round is advanced until the subsequent release of 4000 ms (4 seconds). For this reason, the second or later V-attacker release (see FIG. 49) in the second round of V-planned jackpots (see FIG. 49) or the third and subsequent V-attacker release (see FIG. 49) in the first round of V-passing big hits is performed. It is unlikely that it will be broken. That is, there is a high possibility of proceeding to the next round before all of the V attackers are released a plurality of times. From this, it is based on at least a specified number of entrances among the V-attacker opening several times in the second round of V-planned jackpots and the multiple V-attacker opening in the first round of jackpots not passing V By setting the opening patterns up to the opening times where the round end condition can be satisfied to the same pattern, it is possible to achieve the gaming characteristics and operational effects of the above-described embodiment.

  In the above-described embodiment, the open pattern of the long open with a long open time (first open pattern) and the open pattern of the short open with a short open time (second open pattern) are used as the open pattern of the V attacker in the V round. And provided. Specifically, as an opening pattern for long opening (V round opening pattern for V passing planned big hit), an opening pattern for performing 16000 ms opening once, 1000 ms opening once, 4000 ms opening once and 1000 ms opening twice in this order. (Open pattern with an open time of 23000 ms) is provided, and as an open pattern of short open (V round open pattern for V unpassed planned big hit), an open pattern s that opens 100 ms once and an open pattern that opens twice in this order (Open pattern with an open time of 100 ms). Of these, the long opening pattern may be an opening time that can increase the possibility of entering the game ball into the V attacker (making it easy to enter). Or once, either. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of difficulty (difficulty) in discriminating between V-passing expected jackpots and non-passing expected jackpots, it is desirable that the number of times of opening be opened a plurality of times. In addition, the opening pattern of the multiple opening in the V round is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and the number of opening of the multiple opening is appropriately set in consideration of the difficulty of determining the big hit type. It is possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the V attacker release time when the first round is performed as a non-specific round, the V attacker release time of the first round (first non-specific round) of the expected V passing big hit and V The opening time for the first opening of the V-attacker in the first round (second non-specific round) of the planned passing big hit is both 100 ms (0.1 seconds), and a game ball enters the V-attacker The possibility of doing it was low (substantially impossible). However, the opening time of the V attacker in this case may be a time longer than 100 ms, or may be a time allowing a game ball to enter the V attacker.

  In the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the chance round is performed from the start of the big hit game, that is, a configuration in which the chance round is performed in the first to second rounds (in the modified example, the first to third rounds) is illustrated. However, the chance round may be performed in the middle of the big hit game or may be performed including the end time. That is, the opening operation of the V attacker related to the chance round can be performed not only in the first to second rounds (in the modified example, the first to third rounds) but also in other rounds. Further, for all the big hit games, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) are not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications. Various patterns can be adopted without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode of the ending effect in the set ending period is not limited to that described above. Another aspect of the ending effect may be as follows. For example, the 2R seventh big hit of the embodiment is “V-passing expected big hit”, which is the same number of rounds (2 rounds) as the 2R eighth big hit that is “V non-passing expected big hit”. These effects during the jackpot game are performed during the ending period by executing a common effect so that it is difficult to recognize whether the 2R seventh big hit or the 2R eighth big hit is recognized. You may make it show the game state which transfers after a big hit game is complete | finished by 7th specific production | presentation. Specifically, in the ending period of 6000 ms per 2R seventh jackpot, once (within 3900 ms), the third non-notification mode transition effect (for example, defeat effect) common to 2R eighth jackpot is executed, and the remaining in the ending period It is possible to perform an effect (for example, a promotion effect and a resurgence effect) indicating that the state is shifted to a high probability state during the period.

  In the gaming machine described above, the specific round game among the plurality of round games constituting the special game may be one round game or a plurality of round games. In the case where a plurality of round games are specified round games, the end period can be determined based on the specific area information after the last specific round game in the special game ends. For example, it can be determined based on the end of the last specific round game, can be determined based on the start of the next round game of the last specific round game, or can be determined based on the end of all round games It is. Further, in the case of a big hit (specific result) that does not change the end period due to passage or non-passage of the specific area 39, at a timing different from the big hit (specific result) that changes the end period by passage or non-passage of the specific area 39 Which end period is to be determined may be determined. For example, in the case of a big hit (specific result) that does not change the end period, the end period may be determined at a timing before the start of the specific round game (V round), or determined with the start of the big hit game Alternatively, it may be determined before the start of the opening operation of the first round game in the jackpot game. Of course, the end period may be determined at the same timing in the case of a jackpot in which the end period is not changed and in the case of a jackpot in which the end period is changed.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described above, a big hit (specific result) for changing the end period by passing or not passing through the specific area 39 is provided. For example, when the result of the determination is a first specific result, the end period is the tenth period when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the end period is the tenth period when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Shorter than the eleventh period. When the result of the determination is a third specific result, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the end period is set to a twelfth period different from the tenth period, and the game ball ends when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. The period may be the 13th period shorter than the 12th period.

  In the embodiment described above, when the ending period (end period) is changed by passing or not passing through the specific region 39, a long time is set when passing and a short time is set when not passing. It is not restricted to such a mode. The end period determining means determines a short time (second period) when the game ball passes the specific area, and determines a long time (first period) when the game ball does not pass the specific area. You may make it do. In addition, when the special game is executed with the result of the above-described determination on whether or not the game machine is determined to be the first specific result, end times of different lengths are determined based on whether or not the game passes through the specific area. When the result is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length may be determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which a player is given a gaming privilege of generating a high probability state based on the fact that a game ball has passed a specific area during a big hit game (during a special game). However, the privilege referred to in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, it gives a player some kind of benefit, such as a high base state that increases the frequency of game balls entering the start opening, or a variation time shortened state that shortens the variation time of identification information (normal state). If there is, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Moreover, based on having passed the specific area | region for the game ball | bowl, you may provide one privilege, or you may provide a some privilege. Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the high probability state is generated based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area, the probability variation counter is set to “10000” and the number of executions of the special symbol success / failure determination is 10,000. Until the next round, in other words, the specification (so-called “V-accuracy loop machine”) that guarantees a high probability state until the next big hit occurs, the value set in the probability variation counter is It is possible to set as appropriate according to the specifications. For example, when the value set in the probability variation counter based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area is “150” and the number of executions of the special symbol success / failure determination in the high probability state is “150”, the special symbol for the next and subsequent times The present invention is applied to a gaming machine (a so-called “V-accuracy ST machine”) having a specification in which the determination of success or failure is performed in a low probability state, that is, a specification in which a high probability state is not guaranteed until the next big hit occurrence. It is also possible. Alternatively, in addition to the probability variation counter, for example, a counter (big hit counter) for counting the number of occurrences of big hits in a high probability state is provided, and the number of big hit occurrences (count value of the big hit counter) is set to a predetermined number (for example, “5”). Then, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine (so-called “V-establishment set machine”) having a specification that always (forcedly) has a low probability state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot of the predetermined number of times (for example, “fifth time”) is completed. It is also possible to apply.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second special figure hold is a control process that digests the first special figure hold in preference to the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, but the first special figure hold is not limited to this. May be a control process for prioritizing the second special figure hold, that is, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. Also, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  In the gaming machine described above, a starter that allows a game ball to enter, and a variable starter that can be changed between a first aspect and a second aspect in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first aspect, At least one of them may be provided, and an identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start port or the variable start port may be provided. In addition, the first winning / nothing determination is made based on the variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter, and the entrance to the start port. First hit / fail judgment means to execute, second hit / no-go judgment means for executing second hit / no-go judgment based on the ball entering the variable start port, and variable when the result of the first hit / no-go judgment or the second hit / no-go judgment becomes a hit Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that allows the entrance to be entered can be provided. In addition, a first game state in which a game ball enters the variable start port has a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the game ball enters the variable start port at a higher frequency than the first game state. It is good also as providing the game state setting means to set to. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero.

[Others]
In a gaming machine equipped with a conventional privilege determination game, the possibility of a game ball passing through a specific area is defined as a variable entrance related to the passage of the game ball to the specific area (hereinafter also referred to as “specific variable entrance"). Generally, it is different depending on the opening pattern. However, in the conventional configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that a special game including a bonus decision game is started, so for a player, the opening of a specific variable entrance is triggered by the start of a special game. It is possible to watch the pattern (opening operation). For this reason, for example, there is a case where it is possible to determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of passage, etc. at an early stage when the specific variable entrance starts to open, that is, at the beginning of the privilege determination game. . In this way, if the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area or the presence / absence of a pass can be determined at the start of the privilege determination game, before the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) Before the result of the game is notified, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area and the presence / absence of the pass, etc. will be known, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the bonus decision game and the dilution of the existence value. is there. On the other hand, the inventions that make it difficult to recognize that a special game including a privilege determination game is started and that can improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a privilege determination game are as follows (1) to (1) to Illustrated in (5).
(1) an identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
A first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the variation display of the identification information;
With
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the first effect execution means displays the first effect in a specific manner. The gaming machine ends after the bonus determination game in the special game after the game starts.

In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The variable entrance is an entrance-impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter and an entrance in which a game ball can enter when the privilege determination game is executed and when the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change to a possible state,
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the first effect execution means displays the first effect in a specific manner. It may be ended after the variable entrance is in a state where it can enter at least once in the special game.

(2) an identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
First effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the special game;
With
When executing the first effect during the special game, the first effect executing means starts the first effect during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. The game machine is characterized in that the effect is ended after the bonus determination game in the special game after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner.

In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The variable entrance is an entrance-impossible state in which a game ball cannot enter and an entrance in which a game ball can enter when the privilege determination game is executed and when the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change to a possible state,
When executing the first effect during the special game, the first effect executing means starts the first effect during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner. The production may be ended after the variable entrance is in a state where it can enter at least once in the special game after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Second effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined second effect after the end of the first effect during the special game;
A third effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined third effect during the variation display of the identification information;
With
The second effect executing means can execute the second effect in an effect manner similar to the third effect.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
The third effect execution means can execute the third effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes,
The second effect executing means can execute the second effect based on an effect aspect selected from a plurality of effect aspects similar to the third effect that can be executed by the third effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
A fourth effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined fourth effect based on the stop display of the identification information;
As an effect mode of the fourth effect when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is more difficult to recognize than the first effect mode,
The fourth effect execution means includes:
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner during the execution of the first effect, The gaming machine, wherein the fourth effect based on the stop display is performed in the second effect mode.

  In a gaming machine equipped with a conventional privilege determination game, an effect for notifying the result of the privilege determination game (hereinafter also referred to as “result notification effect”) is generally performed during a special game. However, in the conventional result notification effect, whether or not a game ball has passed a specific area at a time such as when a special game is in progress and the bonus determination game is finished or when the bonus determination game result is confirmed. In many cases, the displayed image (for example, a character image such as “V”) is simply displayed. In this case, the effect of the performance performed during the special game including the privilege determination game cannot be sufficiently obtained, and there is a possibility that the game interest is lowered. On the other hand, an invention that enhances the effects of the effects performed during special games including a bonus decision game, and by extension, the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a bonus decision game is as follows. Illustrated in (6) to (14).

(6) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
Special game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game;
With
The special game effect executing means is
The gaming machine, wherein the special game effect is executed in an effect mode indicating a result of the privilege determination game during the special game after the privilege determination game is ended.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the special game effect execution means executes the special game effect in an effect mode that does not show the result of the privilege determination game during the special game before the end of the privilege determination game.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (6) or (7) above,
An effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes of the special game effect executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is ended,
The special game effect execution means executes the special game effect after the privilege determination game is ended based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In addition, as an effect mode indicating the result of the privilege determination game, a passing mode indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area, and a non-passing mode indicating that the game ball has not passed the specific area, Have
Each of the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means is provided with an effect mode corresponding to the passing mode and an effect mode corresponding to the non-passing mode. .

(10) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
Special game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game;
With
The special game effect execution means starts a result notification effect indicating the result of the privilege determination game as the special game effect after the bonus determination game is ended during the special game. .

(11) In the gaming machine according to (10) above,
Storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes of the result notification effect;
Selecting means for selecting an effect mode of the result notification effect to be executed from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage unit;
With
The selection means selects an effect mode of the result notification effect before the end of the privilege determination game,
The special game effect execution means starts the result notification effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The special game effect executing means executes a selection effect indicating a result of selection by the selection means as the special game effect during the special game and before the end of the privilege determination game. Machine.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (12) above,
The special game effect execution means executes the result notification effect that is in progress during the special game and started after the end of the privilege determination game in a mode according to the result of the privilege determination game. .
In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (13) above,
The special game effect execution means may execute the result notification effect that starts during the special game and ends after the privilege determination game as a series of effects after the privilege determination game ends.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (13) above,
A gaming machine, wherein a period from the end of the privilege determination game to the end of the special game is longer than a period from the start of the special game to the end of the privilege determination game.

  In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, with respect to privilege granting, game balls that have entered a predetermined variable entrance during special games are distributed to a specific area or a non-specific area by a distribution device in the variable entrance, There is known a gaming machine that gives a privilege when a game ball passes a specific area. If the sorting device is provided inside the variable entrance, the game ball may be caught between the movable parts of the sorting device, which may cause clogging. When such a situation occurs, in the worst case, the game balls that have entered the variable entrance may not be distributed to the specific area side, and there is a possibility that the player will miss the opportunity to grant a privilege. In addition, in a gaming machine having a discharging device such as a payout device, there has been a gaming machine having a control for eliminating a ball clogging by executing a predetermined retry operation when such a ball clogging occurs. . However, in a big hit game, simply performing a retry operation or the like to solve problems such as ball clogging may cause the big hit game to stagnate. In addition, if the big hit game is stagnant, there is a possibility that the player may lower the gaming interest. The inventions (15) to (28) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and are intended to advance the jackpot game quickly and smoothly and improve the game entertainment.

(15) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start port;
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Special game execution means for executing a special game for changing the variable entrance to a state in which entry is possible based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
Entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entrance,
Discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the entrance detection means,
And a movable member that is arranged in a path until the game ball detected by the entrance detection means is detected by the discharge detection means, and that can change the flow direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation. A gaming machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
In the round game, the variable entrance is in a state where it can enter or cannot enter in a predetermined pattern,
When executing the predetermined round game, after finishing the last entry possible state in the round game, the predetermined entry process is executed with the variable entry port being in a no entry state,
The confirmation process includes at least
A match determination process for determining whether or not the number of balls entered and discharged from the variable entrance in the round game matches based on the detection results of the ball detection means and the discharge detection means;
A movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on determining that the number of balls entering the variable entrance and the number of discharges do not match in the match determination process,
The coincidence determination process can be executed a plurality of times in a period before the execution of the movable member operation process.
If it is determined in the matching determination process that the number of balls entering the variable entrance is equal to the number of discharges before the movable member operation process is performed, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. A game machine characterized by ending.

(16) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
An entry detection means for detecting entry into the second variable entry slot;
Discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the entrance detection means,
A movable member that is arranged on a path until the game ball detected by the entrance detection means is detected by the discharge detection means, and that can change the advancing direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation; A gaming machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games, and for each round game, one of the first variable entrance and the second variable entrance changes to a state in which entry is possible. And
In the case of executing the predetermined round game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter, the second variable entrance is entered after finishing the last possible entrance state in the round game. A predetermined confirmation process is executed as an impossible state,
The confirmation process includes at least
A match determination process for determining whether or not the number of balls entering the second variable entrance and the number of discharges in the round game match based on detection results of the ball detection unit and the discharge detection unit;
A movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on determining that the number of balls entering the second variable entrance and the number of discharges do not match in the match determination process,
The special game includes a first round game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter and a second round game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter, and A special game having a pattern for executing the first round game after the second round game in a round game execution pattern,
In the case where the confirmation process is executed after the special game is executed and the last entry enabled state in the second round game is completed, at least a part of the confirmation process is performed in the first round game. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be performed during execution.

  Thereby, without waiting for the completion of the confirmation process, the confirmation process of the predetermined round game and the next round game of the predetermined round game (the next round game can be entered) are executed in parallel. It is possible to make the big hit game proceed quickly and smoothly. This is a pattern in which a continuous round game is composed of a second round game in which the second grand prize opening is ready to enter and a first round game in which the first grand prize opening is ready to enter ( It is made possible by having a special game having the reverse).

(17) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Special game execution means for executing a special game for changing the variable entrance to a state in which entry is possible based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
Entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entrance,
A first discharge detection means and a second discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball detection means;
A movable member for guiding the game ball detected by the entrance detection means to a specific area or a non-specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on a game ball passing through the specific area,
The first discharge detection means detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific region,
The second discharge detection means detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
As the round game, at least,
A specific round game capable of guiding the game ball to a specific area or a non-specific area, with the variable entrance opening being in a state where it can enter,
A non-specific round game that guides the game ball to a non-specific area, while allowing the variable entrance to enter.
When executing the predetermined round game, after finishing the last entry possible state in the round game, the predetermined entry process is executed with the variable entry port being in a no entry state,
The confirmation process includes at least
Based on the detection results of the entrance detection means, the first exit detection means, and the second exit detection means, whether or not the number of entrances to the variable entrance and the number of exits in the round game match. Match determination processing
A movable member operation process for operating the movable member based on determining that the number of balls entering the variable entrance and the number of discharges do not match in the match determination process,
The special game includes the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and a special game having a pattern for executing the specific round game after the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game. Prepared,
In the case of executing the special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed next to the non-specific round game. .

  A specific round game that has a function of allocating a game ball that has entered a variable entrance by moving a movable member to a specific area or a non-specific area is not likely to cause clogging or the like in the variable entrance Higher than specific round games. For this reason, by performing the confirmation process in the specific round game, it becomes possible to accurately detect and eliminate the ball clogging and the like. In addition, since a specific round game is an important round game that determines whether or not a privilege is granted, if a ball clogging or the like occurs before the start of the specific round game, it may cause unexpected damage to the player. . Therefore, even in a non-specific round game that is a round game before the start of a specific land game and the same variable entrance is in a state in which it is possible to enter the ball, by performing the confirmation process, there is a ball clogging or the like in the non-specific round game. It is possible to start a specific round game after confirming that there is no, or if there is a ball clogging or the like, and after finding and eliminating it properly. As a result, it is possible to start a specific round game in a normal state with no ball clogging or the like, and it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unexpected damage.

(18) In the gaming machine described in (15) above,
When the confirmation process is executed, the next round game can be executed after the confirmation process is completed.

(19) In the gaming machine described in (16) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that at least the movable member operation process among the confirmation processes related to the second round game can be performed during the execution of the first round game.

(20) In the gaming machine described in (16) or (19) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that at least the match determination process among the confirmation processes related to the second round game can be performed during the execution of the first round game.

(21) In the gaming machine according to (16), (19) or (20) above,
The special game includes the first round game and the second round game, and the execution pattern of the round game includes the second round game, the second round game, the first round game, and the second round game. Including a first special game having a pattern to execute in order;
In the case where the confirmation process is executed after executing the first special game and ending the last entry enabled state in the second round game,
At least a part of the confirmation process can be performed during the execution of the first round game, which is the next round game of the second round game, and the first round game is followed by the first round game. When there is a plan to execute a two-round game, the second round game is not executed until the confirmation process is completed.

(22) In the gaming machine described in (17) above,
The game in which the confirmation process is executed at least in both the first specific round game executed in the special game and the non-specific round game executed immediately before the specific round game. Machine.

(23) In the gaming machine according to (17) or (22) above,
The special game includes the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and executes the specific round game after the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game. Including a first special game having a pattern for executing a specific round game;
In the case of executing the first special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game to be executed next to the non-specific round game. In the non-specific round game executed after the specific round game, the match determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed.

(24) In the gaming machine according to (16), (17), (19) to (23),
The coincidence determination process can be executed a plurality of times in a period before the execution of the movable member operation process.
If it is determined in the matching determination process that the number of balls entering the variable entrance is equal to the number of discharges before the movable member operation process is performed, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. A game machine characterized by ending.

(25) In the gaming machine according to (15), (16), (18) to (21) above,
The discharge detection means comprises a first discharge detection means and a second discharge detection means,
By causing the movable member to perform a predetermined operation, the game ball detected by the entrance detection means is guided to a specific area or a non-specific area,
A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on a game ball passing through the specific area,
The first discharge detection means detects a game ball passing through the non-specific area,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second discharge detection means detects a game ball passing through the specific area.

(26) In the gaming machine according to (15) to (25) above,
In the second discharge detection means, an effective period for providing a privilege when a game ball is detected and an invalid period for not providing a privilege even when a game ball is detected are set,
After completing the last entry enabled state in the specific round game, the effective period continues for the first period while the variable entrance is in an inaccessible state, and after the first period has elapsed, the invalid period and If you want to
The movable member operation process can be executed after continuing the invalid period for a second period,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the valid period after the last entry enabled state in the round game is completed.

(27) In the gaming machine according to (26), the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times in each of the first period and the second period.

(28) In the gaming machine according to (15) to (27) above,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the match determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle from the start of the confirmation process to the end of the confirmation process.

(29) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (28) above, the following configuration may be added.
Specifically, in the gaming machine described above, “as a confirmation process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entrance and the number of discharges do not match, an error notification is made in a predetermined manner after a predetermined time has elapsed. Error notification processing to execute
The match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the period before the execution of the error notification process.
Before executing the error notification process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering and exiting the variable entrance matches, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process. Good.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, “the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the error notification process,
During the execution of the error notification process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering the variable entrance and the number of discharges match, the error notification being executed is terminated and the confirmation process is terminated. Also good.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, “the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the error notification,
In the coincidence determination process executed during the error notification, if it is not determined that the number of balls entering the variable entrance and the number of discharges match, the error notification is terminated after a predetermined period of time, and the confirmation process is performed. It may be “finished”.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, “the error notification process can be executed when the third period has elapsed after the movable member operation process is completed,
The coincidence determination process can be executed a plurality of times in the third period,
When the match determination process determines that the number of balls entered into the variable entrance and the number of discharges match during the third period, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process. Good.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described above, the specific round game allows the passing of the game ball to the specific area, and a privilege is given when the game ball passes the specific area. It is good also as "round game which can grant the privilege of". On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, the movable member does not operate, and the game balls do not pass through the specific area (all pass through the non-specific area). It may be a “round game not granted”.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described above, “a special game having a pattern for executing a specific round game next to a non-specific round game in a round game execution pattern” is a plurality of round games constituting a special game, It is only necessary to have a part that is executed in the order of non-specific round games and specific round games. For other round games, whether it is a non-specific round game or a specific round game, other rounds It may be a game.

  In the above-described gaming machine, “the first special game having a pattern in which the first round game is executed after the second round game as the execution pattern of the round game” is the execution of the round game executed in the special game. A second round game in which the second variable entrance is ready to enter a part of the pattern and a first round game in which the first variable entrance is ready to enter are continuously executed. The other round game may be a first round game or a second round game. Further, it is sufficient that the confirmation process is executed in a specific second round game, and the confirmation process may or may not be executed in other round games. For example, in a special game composed of 15 round games, the second round is the second round game, the third round is the first round game, and the confirmation process can be executed in the second round game of the second round If so, the other round games may be any round games, and the confirmation process may not be executed. Further, as a special game, it is sufficient if a special game having such an execution pattern is provided, and in addition, a special game having no such execution pattern may be provided.

  Conventionally, in a special game, a game ball passes through a specific area in the special winning opening, and then a predetermined privilege is given, and an ending period is provided after all opening operations in the special game are completed. There is one that executes an ending effect for notifying the player of the game mode (privilege granting state) to be transferred after the game ends. In the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-161615), a plurality of effects are provided as ending effects. It is described to be executed. However, in such a gaming machine, no matter what the gaming mode after the transition is, the ending effect composed of the same effect period is executed, so there is no sharpness, and the ending effect is less interesting. It was. The inventions (30) to (38) exemplified below have been made in view of such circumstances, and by setting an ending period according to the game result, an appropriate ending according to the gaming state to be transferred It is possible to perform the production and improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(30) correct / incorrect determination means for determining correct / incorrect based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the determination of success or failure;
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A specific area provided in the variable entrance and through which a game ball can pass;
Special game execution means for executing a special game in which when the result of the determination of success or failure becomes a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and the variable entrance can be changed to a state in which it is possible to enter. ,
A gaming machine in which the special game is executed and a game ball can be given a predetermined privilege based on passing through the specific area,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
When executing the special game, after ending all round games in the special game, the identification information can be variably displayed after an end period of a predetermined period has elapsed.
As the end period, comprising an end period determining means for determining any of a plurality of end periods having different lengths,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the end period determining means can determine the end periods having different lengths based on whether or not a game ball passes through the specific area.

(31) In the gaming machine described in (30) above,
A entrance that can be changed between a first aspect and a second aspect in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first aspect;
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which a game ball enters the entrance with a higher frequency than the first game state;
The identification result has a first identification result,
When executing the special game as the first specific result in the first gaming state, the end period of different length is determined based on whether or not the specific area is passed,
When the special game is executed with the first specific result in the second game state, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether or not the specific area is passed. To play.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first specifying result is obtained and the first specifying result is obtained in the first gaming state in which a game ball is entered at a low frequency (normal), the first specifying result is obtained. Determines an end period having a different length depending on whether or not it passes through the specific area. In addition, in the second gaming state in which game balls have a high frequency of entry, if the first specific result is obtained, an end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether or not it passes through the specific area. (That is, the end period does not change). Thus, for example, by changing the end period by passing or not passing a specific region (privilege grant or non-grant) in the normal state, the change display of the identification information is started after the end period of an appropriate length. It becomes possible to give a sharpness to the transition state of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the game state is already in the second game state (for example, the high base state), the end period is not changed by passing through the specific area or not passing (giving or not granting a privilege), thereby responding to the game state during the game. It is possible to set an appropriate end period and give a sharpness to the transition state of the gaming state.

(32) In the gaming machine described in (31) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming state setting means can set the gaming state after the special game is ended to the second gaming state.

(33) In the gaming machine according to (30) to (32) above,
A probability setting means capable of setting the success / failure determination probability for determining that the result of the determination of success / failure is the specific result to a predetermined probability or a high probability higher than the predetermined probability;
A gaming machine, wherein the special game is executed and a game ball passes through the specific area, and the success / failure determination probability after the special game ends is set to the high probability.

(34) In the gaming machine according to (30) to (33) above,
During the execution of the end period determined by the end period determination means, comprising end period effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
As an effect that can be executed in the end period, there are a plurality of effects with different effect modes and effect periods,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the end period effect means executes an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determination means.

(35) In the gaming machine described in (34) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the end period effect means can execute an effect indicating a game state set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determination means.

(36) In the gaming machine described in (30) above,
As the end period, at least a first period and a second period shorter than the first period,
The ending period determining means determines the first period when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game, and determines the first period when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game. The second period may be determined.

(37) In the gaming machine described in (36) above,
As the specific result, it has a first specific result and a second specific result,
When the result of the determination is that the first specific result is to execute the special game, the end period determining unit determines the first period when the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game. Determine the second period when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game,
When the result of the determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period determination means is the same whether the game ball passes or does not pass through the specific area in the special game. A gaming machine characterized by determining the end period of length.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first specific result and the second specific result are included as the specific results, and if the result of the determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, An end period having a different length is determined depending on whether or not the game passes through a specific area (passing is a first period, non-passing is a second period). Further, when a special game is executed when the result of the determination is the second specific result, an end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether the special game passes or does not pass through the special game ( That is, the end period does not change). As a result, depending on the type of the specific result, it is possible to change the end period or not to change the end period by passing or not passing the specific area (giving or not granting privilege). In addition, this makes it possible to set an end period with an appropriate length depending on the type of the specific result, and after starting an end period with an appropriate length, it is possible to start displaying the variation of identification information. It becomes possible to give sharpness to the transition state of the gaming state.

(38) In the gaming machine described in (36) above,
During the execution of the end period determined by the end period determination means, comprising end period effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
As an effect that can be executed in the end period, there are a plurality of effects with different effect modes and effect periods,
The end period effect means executes an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determination means,
When the result of the determination is that the first specific result is used to execute the special game, the end period effect means is a game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determination means. Execute the recognizable state,
In the case where the result of the determination of success or failure is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period effect means is a game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determination means. A gaming machine characterized by executing an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the determination is a first specific result and the special game is executed, an effect capable of recognizing a game state set after the special game is provided as an effect in the end period. Run. On the other hand, when the result of the determination is a second specific result and the special game is executed, an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the game state set after the special game is executed as the effect in the end period. Thereby, when the result of the determination is the first specific result, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the end period of the first period (long term) is set, and the game ball passes through the specific area. If not, the end period of the second period (short period) is set. And, in the end period of an appropriate length set according to the grant or non-grant of a privilege, it is possible to perform an effect capable of recognizing the gaming state after the transition (for example, a high probability state, a low probability state, etc.) It becomes. In addition, when the result of the determination is a second specific result, in the set end period, an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the gaming state after the transition (for example, a high probability state, a low probability state) is performed. A similar effect (for example, a non-notification effect) is executed regardless of whether the specific region is passed or not. Therefore, when the second specific result is obtained, an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the game state after the transition is performed in the specific end period without changing the end period set by passing or not passing through the specific area. Is possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the end period of an appropriate length according to the transition state of the gaming state and the effect mode performed in the end period. In addition, this makes it possible to start displaying the identification information in a variable manner after an end period of an appropriate length, and to give a sharpness to the transition state of the gaming state.

  The patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-161615) has five types of special games A to E, and the number of game balls that can be acquired varies depending on the type of special game (500 to 2000). It is described. Therefore, if it is a special game with a large number of game balls that can be acquired, it will increase the appeal of the game, but if it becomes a special game with a small number of game balls that can be acquired, it will reduce the game entertainment interest and May be reduced. In particular, as a result of playing a game without acquiring a special game for a long time, if the acquired special game is a special game with a small number of game balls that can be acquired, there is a possibility that the possibility of lowering the game will be particularly high. There is. The inventions (39) to (47) exemplified below are made in view of such circumstances, and when a big hit with a relatively low profit for the player occurs, a big hit with a high profit for the player is generated. Compared to the case where it occurs, it is difficult to understand the start of the big hit game, to prevent the player's willingness to play, and to maintain and improve the game interest.

(39) A entrance that can be changed between a first aspect and a second aspect in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first aspect;
A gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state or a second gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the entrance with a higher frequency than the first gaming state;
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the determination;
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter,
When the result of the determination becomes a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and includes a special game execution means for executing a special game that can change the variable entrance into a state in which the entrance can be performed
As the specific result, at least a first specific result and a second specific result are included,
When the determination result is the first specific result, the first special game is executed, and when the determination result is the second specific result, the second special game is executed.
As an effect that can be executed at least during the special game, a first special effect that can easily recognize the start of the special game, and a second special effect that is less likely to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. Have
In at least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, if the result of the determination is the first specific result, the second gaming state is set after the end of the first special game, and the result of the determination is In the case of the second specific result, the end of the second special game is set as the first game state,
A gaming machine, wherein the first special game is executed in the first special game, and the second special game is executed in the second special game.

(40) In the gaming machine of (39) above,
It has a specific starting port where game balls can enter,
The predetermined condition is established based on at least a game ball entering the specific start port,
As a result of the determination based on the ball entering the specific start opening, having a plurality of specific results including the second specific result,
In the case where the result of the determination based on the ball entering the specific start opening is the specific result, the second specific result is a specific result having the lowest advantage among the plurality of specific results. To play.

(41) In the gaming machine of (39) or (40) above,
A probability setting means capable of setting a probability of determining that the determination result is the specific result to a predetermined probability or a high probability higher than the predetermined probability;
As the variable entrance, it has a specific variable entrance with a specific area inside,
The probability setting means can set the high probability after the end of the special game based on a game ball passing through the specific area in the special game,
As the execution mode of the special game, it has a first execution mode in which a game ball is likely to pass through the specific area, and a second execution mode in which a game ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second special game is executed in the second execution mode.

(42) In any one of the above gaming machines (39) to (41),
As the specific result, it has a third specific result,
When the result of the determination is the third specific result, the third special game is executed,
In at least one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, if the result of the determination is the third specific result, the second gaming state is set after the end of the third special game,
In the third special game, the second special effect is executed and, as the second special effect, an effect with an effect result different from the second special effect executed in the second special game is executed. A featured gaming machine.

(43) In any of the above gaming machines (39) to (42),
A gaming machine, wherein the start timing of the second special effect is earlier than the start timing of the first special effect.

(44) In any one of the above gaming machines (39) to (43),
The first special effect is an effect different from the variable effect executed during the variable display of the identification information related to the first specific result, and the first special game is started after the variable effect ends. It is an effect that starts after executing the start effect shown,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second special effect is a series of effects that start from the middle of execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the second specific result.

(45) In any one of the above gaming machines (39) to (44),
A gaming machine, wherein both the first special game and the second special game can acquire a predetermined amount of game profit.

(46) In the gaming machine of (44) or (45) above,
In the course of executing the variable display of the identification information related to the second specific result, the gaming machine is shifted from the effect suggesting that the result of the determination is not the specific result to the second special effect.

(47) In any one of the above gaming machines (39) to (46),
In the second special game in the second special game, the game machine is characterized in that an effect of a production result suggesting that the result of the determination is not a specific result is executed, and the second special game is ended.

In the above gaming machine,
`` As a variation effect that starts and ends during the execution of variation display of identification information,
If the result of the determination is a specific result, an effect that suggests that the result of the determination is a specific result (effect of the hit mode) is executed. If the result of the determination is not a specific result, the result of the determination is specified. It has a specific effect that performs an effect that suggests that it is not a result (effect of an outlier)
In the second special effect, an effect common to the effect that suggests that the result of the determination in the specific effect is not the specific result (the effect of the off-state) may be executed.

In the above gaming machine,
“As a specific result, we have a third specific result for executing the third special game,
As a production that can be executed at least during the special game, it has a third special production,
The third special effect that can be executed during the special game is an effect that is executed at least during the third special game, and is more difficult to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. ,
When the result of determination in the first gaming state is the third specific result, the third special effect is executed along with the third special game, and the second gaming state is set after the end of the third special game. Good.

Further, “in the third special effect, an effect suggesting that the determination result is a specific result is executed, and the third special game is ended”.
In addition, “As a variation effect that starts and ends during the execution of the variation display of the identification information,
If the result of the determination is a specific result, an effect that suggests that the result of the determination is a specific result is executed. If the result of the determination is not a specific result, it is suggested that the result of the determination is not a specific result. It has a specific effect to execute the effect,
In the third special effect, an effect common to the effect suggesting that the determination result in the specific effect is the specific result may be executed.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the start of the special game, and depending on the player, there is a possibility that an impression that the advantageous state (second game state) has occurred without the special game being executed. Here, it is possible to set the third special effect as an effect mode that is more difficult to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect, and the same effect mode as the second special effect. Further, the second special effect may not execute the start effect.

Furthermore, other inventions related to the above-described inventions are exemplified in the following (48) to (79).
(48) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which whether or not to grant the privilege is determined based on whether or not the game ball has passed to the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game;
A gaming machine equipped with
Special game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game;
Storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes relating to a special game effect that can be executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed;
Selection means for selecting an effect mode to be executed from among a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means, based on the result of the privilege determination game;
Have
The gaming machine characterized in that the special game executing means executes the special game effect during the special game after the privilege determination game is ended based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means.

(49) In the gaming machine of (48),
The selection means, when selecting an effect mode to be executed from among the plurality of effect modes, selects the effect mode to be executed based on a predetermined selection rate according to a result of the privilege determination game. To play.

(50) In the gaming machine of (48) or (49),
The gaming machine, wherein the special game effect execution means executes the special game effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means as a series of effects after the end of the privilege determination game.

(51) In any one of the above gaming machines (48) to (50),
The special game execution means executes the special game effect during the special game before the end of the privilege determination game in a mode indicating which effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. A gaming machine characterized by

(52) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance opening that allows the game ball to enter the inaccessible state by closing, and enters the enterable state to allow the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The variable entrance is in a state where the entrance is possible with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
As the round game, at least the variable entrance is set to the entrance enabled state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entrance is set to the entrance enable state and the movable member is A non-specific round game that does not operate,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and a round game after the predetermined number of times can be executed as the specific round game,
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to the predetermined time after the start of the specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game; The opening pattern of the variable entrance is the same from the start of the non-specific round game to the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine of (52) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, the game ball that has entered the variable entrance is likely to be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. It will be a thing. On the other hand, in a non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable entrance is not guided to the specific area, and the possibility of passing through the specific area is low or absent. . And the opening pattern of the variable entrance when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable entrance when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game The mouth opening pattern is the same. For this reason, it becomes difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

  The “predetermined time after the start of the specific round game” in the “predetermined time after the start of the specific round game from the start of the nonspecific round game when executing the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game” "Includes a predetermined time until the end of the specific round game (during the specific round game) and a predetermined time in the next round game (next round and later) performed after the end of the specific round game. . The round game after the next time may be a non-specific round game, a specific round game, or other round games. Similarly, the “predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game” from the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game to the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game is , Including a predetermined time until the end of the non-specific round game (during the non-specific round game) and a predetermined time in the next round game (next round and later) to be performed after the end of the non-specific round game. It is a waste. The round game after the next time may be a non-specific round game, a specific round game, or other round games.

(53) In the gaming machine of (52) above,
One round game is completed when at least a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable entrance,
The predetermined time after the start of the specific round game in the first special game and the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game, respectively, the predetermined number of game balls are variably inserted by the time. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to enter a ball opening.

(54) In the gaming machine of (52) or (53) above,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to the end of the specific round game in the first special game, and the start to end of the non-specific round game in the second special game A gaming machine characterized by the same opening pattern of the variable entrance.

(55) In any one of the above gaming machines (52) to (54),
When the specific round game is executed in the second special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance in the specific round game is the variable entrance in the specific round game in the first special game. A gaming machine characterized by an opening pattern in which the possibility of entering a game ball is lower than the opening pattern.

(56) In any one of the above gaming machines (52) to (55),
A gaming machine, wherein a first round game among the plurality of round games is executed as the non-specific round game, and a second round game subsequent thereto is executed as the specific round game.

(57) In any one of the above gaming machines (52) to (56),
Providing production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The effect execution means executes the same effect at least after the start of the non-specific round game in the first special game and after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game. A gaming machine.

(58) In any one of the above gaming machines (52) to (57),
Separately from the variable entrance, other variable entrances that enter the entrance-impossible state where the game ball cannot enter by closing and enter the entrance-impossible state where the game ball can enter by opening. Have
The other variable entrance is in the special game, and the entrance in a predetermined release pattern in the round game other than the non-specific round game and the specific round game among the plurality of round games. It will be possible,
The opening pattern when the other variable entrance is opened during the first special game is the same as the opening pattern when the other variable entrance is opened during the second special game. A gaming machine characterized by being.

(59) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start opening
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance opening that allows the game ball to enter the inaccessible state by closing, and enters the enterable state to allow the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The variable entrance is opened or closed during the special game to enter the entrance enabled state or the entrance disabled state,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
As the round game, at least the variable entrance is set to the entrance enabled state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entrance is set to the entrance enable state and the movable member is A non-specific round game that does not operate,
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game,
When the non-specific round game is executed in the predetermined number of round games of the first special game and the specific round game is executed in the next round game of the predetermined number of times, the variable in the non-specific round game Opening and closing the opening at least once, and opening and closing the variable entrance in the specific round game after a predetermined closing time,
When executing the non-specific round game in the predetermined number of round games of the second special game, the non-specific round game in the first special game and the specific round game in the non-specific round game A gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing operation of the variable entrance is performed in the same manner as the opening / closing operation.

  According to the gaming machine of (59), since the movable member operates in the specific round game, the game ball that has entered the variable entrance is likely to be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. It will be a thing. On the other hand, in a non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable entrance is not guided to the specific area, and the possibility of passing through the specific area is low or absent. . The opening and closing operation of the variable entrance when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable entrance when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game The opening / closing operation of the mouth is similar. For this reason, it becomes difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening / closing operation of the variable entrance. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

(60) In the gaming machine of (59) above,
When the specific round game is executed in the next round game of the predetermined number of times of the second special game, in the specific round game, compared to the specific round game in the first special game, A gaming machine, wherein the variable entrance is opened in such a manner that a game ball is less likely to enter.

(61) In the gaming machine of (59) or (60) above,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game.

(62) In any one of the above gaming machines (59) to (61),
Providing production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The production execution means
Executing a series of effects in the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game;
A game machine, wherein an effect similar to the series of effects is executed at least in the non-specific round game in the second special game.

(63) In any one of the above gaming machines (59) to (62),
Separately from the variable entrance, other variable entrances that enter the entrance-impossible state where the game ball cannot enter by closing and enter the entrance-impossible state where the game ball can enter by opening. Have
The other variable entrance is opened or closed during the special game to be in the entrance enabled state or the entrance disabled state, and the non-specific round game and the non-specific round game of the plurality of round games and In the round game other than the specific round game, it is possible to enter the ball,
The same opening / closing operation when the other variable entrance is opened during the first special game and the opening / closing operation when the other variable entrance is opened during the second special game. A game machine characterized by being performed in the form of

(64) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows the game ball to enter by closing, and allows the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
The variable entrance is capable of opening at a predetermined opening time during the special game,
As the special game, at least,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games are set as a first non-specific round in which a first opening operation is performed in which the opening time of the variable entrance is a first time and the movable member is not operated. Executing the second round game of the predetermined number of times, performing a second opening operation in which the opening time of the variable entrance is a second time longer than the first time, and operating the movable member A first special game executed as one specific round;
A second special game in which the predetermined number of round games are executed as a second non-specific round in which the opening operation similar to the first opening operation and the second opening operation is performed in this order and the movable member is not operated; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine of (64) above, the second opening operation when the first specific round is executed increases the possibility that the game ball can enter the variable entrance (easier to enter). Since the movable member operates in the first specific round in which the second opening operation is performed, the game ball that has entered the variable entrance is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. The possibility is high. On the other hand, in the first non-specific round and the second non-specific round, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable entrance may not be guided to the specific area and may pass through the specific area. Is low or absent. In the first special game, when the first non-specific round and the first specific round are executed, the opening operation of the variable entrance (first opening operation, second opening operation) and the second special game The opening operation of the variable entrance when the second non-specific round is executed is the same. For this reason, it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening operation of the variable entrance. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

(65) In the gaming machine of (64) above,
In the second special game, the next round game of the predetermined number of times is set so that the opening time of the variable entrance is shorter than the second time, and the game ball enters the variable entrance A gaming machine, wherein a third opening operation in which the possibility is lower than the first specific round is performed and the second specific round is performed to operate the movable member.

(66) In the gaming machine of (64) or (65),
The gaming machine, wherein the second opening operation is an opening operation of opening the variable entrance opening a plurality of times within the second time period.

(67) In any one of the above gaming machines (64) to (66),
In the first special game, after executing the round game as the first non-specific round, the round game as the first specific round is executed through a predetermined interval period,
In the second special game, when the round game as the second non-specific round is executed, after performing the first release operation, the second release operation is performed after a closing time similar to the interval period. A gaming machine characterized by

(68) In any one of the above gaming machines (64) to (67),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game.

(69) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows the game ball to enter by closing, and allows the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
The variable entrance is openable in a predetermined opening pattern in the round game,
As the opening pattern of the variable entrance, at least a first opening pattern in which the opening time of the variable entrance is a predetermined time, and a second in which the opening time is shorter than the first opening pattern. An opening pattern,
As the round game, at least,
A first specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the first opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A second specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the second opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A non-specific round game that opens the variable entrance in a predetermined opening pattern and does not operate the movable member,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the first specific round game or the second specific round game,
One or both of a previous round game that continues before the predetermined number of times and a rear round game that continues after the predetermined number of times, and either or both of the previous round game and the subsequent round game are It can be executed as a specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game capable of executing the first specific round game and the non-specific round game, and a second special game capable of executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game, Have
In the first special game, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, the variable entrance opening pattern in the execution period and the second special game The game machine characterized by having the same opening pattern of the variable entrance in the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed.

  According to the gaming machine of (69) above, the opening pattern (first opening pattern) of the variable entrance when the first specific round game is executed is the variable input when the second specific round game is executed. Since the opening time is longer than the opening pattern of the ball opening (second opening pattern), the first specific round game has a higher possibility of entering the game ball into the variable ball opening than the second specific round game (input) Sphere becomes easy) For this reason, in the first specific round game, the possibility that the game ball is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area is higher than that in the second specific round game. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable entrance is not guided to the specific area and does not pass through the specific area. Then, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game, and the second specific round game in the second special game and The opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game when the non-specific round game is executed is the same. For this reason, it becomes difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

  Note that “having one or both of the previous round game following the predetermined number of times and the subsequent round game following the predetermined number of times” means that the round game following the predetermined number of times is the predetermined number of times. Including the case where it exists before, the case where it exists after the predetermined number of times, and the case where it exists before and after the predetermined number of times. In addition, “one or both of the previous round game and the subsequent round game can be executed as the non-specific round game” means that the round game existing before the predetermined number of times is executed as the non-specific round game. And a case where a round game existing after a predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game and a case where a round game existing before and after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game. In addition, for the “first specific round game and the non-specific round game” in the first special game and “the second specific round game and the non-specific round game” in the second special game, the specific round game (first specific game) The execution order of the round game, the second specific round game) and the non-specific round game may be the first (or the second). That is, even if the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is “first” and the non-specific round game is “after”, the non-specific round game is “first” and the specific round game (first Either “1” specific round game or “2nd specific round game” may be “after”. In addition, “the execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed” refers to the start of one of the first specific round game and the non-specific round game. The period until the end of the other round game is indicated, and “the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed” means the second specific round game and the non-specific round game. Indicates the period from the start of one of the round games to the end of the other round game.

(70) In the gaming machine of (69) above,
A gaming machine having at least one previous round game before the predetermined number of times, and executing the previous round game as the non-specific round game.

  According to the gaming machine of (70), the first special game that executes at least one round game that follows the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least the second specific round game that continues before the second specific round game Specifications including a second special game for executing one round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round) after at least one non-specific round game In a specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) for executing a game) through the one non-specific round game and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) The opening pattern of the variable entrance is the same for the first special game and the second special game. This makes it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (the first special game or the second special game) in the specification.

(71) In the gaming machine of (69) or (70),
There is at least one after-round game after the predetermined number of times, and the after-round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

  According to the gaming machine of (71), the first special game that executes at least one round game that follows the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least one time that follows the second specific round game Specifications including a second special game for executing a round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, at least one non-specific round game next to a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In a specification with a special game (first special game, second special game) for executing a game, opening a variable entrance through a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) and a non-specific round game The pattern can be the same for the first special game and the second special game. This makes it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (the first special game or the second special game) in the specification. The specification can include the specification related to the gaming machine (66). That is, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is executed next to at least one non-specific round game, and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In the specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) for executing at least one non-specific round game next to the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through each round game is designated as the first special game. It is possible to make the same between the game and the second special game.

(72) In any one of the above gaming machines (69) to (71),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game or a second round game.

(73) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance opening that allows the game ball to enter the inaccessible state by closing, and enters the enterable state to allow the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The variable entrance is in a state where the entrance is possible with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
As the round game, at least the variable entrance is set to the entrance enabled state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entrance is set to the entrance enable state and the movable member is A non-specific round game that does not operate,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the specific round game, and a next round game of the predetermined number of times can be executed as the non-specific round game,
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance in the specific round game in the first special game can enter the game ball compared to the opening pattern of the variable entrance in the specific round game in the second special game It is a highly open pattern,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second The opening pattern of the variable entrance is the same from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in a special game. A gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of (73) above, the opening pattern of the variable entrance when the specific round game is executed in the first special game is the same as the case where the specific round game is executed in the second special game. Compared to the opening pattern of the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the variable entrance becomes higher (it is easier to enter), so the first special game is a game than the second special game. There is a high possibility that the sphere is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. When the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game and the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the second special game Since the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game is the same when the game is executed, the variable entrance opening pattern can be distinguished from the first special game and the second special game. It becomes difficult. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

(74) In the gaming machine of (73) above,
The opening time of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game A game machine characterized in that the opening time of the variable entrance is based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start to the end of the non-specific round game.

(75) In the gaming machine of (73) or (74),
The number of opening of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game The number of opening of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start to the end of the non-specific round game is the same.

(76) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the starting port;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance opening that allows the game ball to enter the inaccessible state by closing, and enters the enterable state to allow the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The variable entrance is in a state where the entrance is possible with a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
As the round game, at least the variable entrance is set to the entrance enabled state and the movable member is operated, and the variable entrance is set to the entrance enable state and the movable member is A non-specific round game that does not operate,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and a next round game of the predetermined number of times can be executed as the specific round game,
The special game has at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance in the specific round game in the first special game can enter the game ball compared to the opening pattern of the variable entrance in the specific round game in the second special game It is a highly open pattern,
An opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game; When the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in a special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game is the same. A gaming machine.

  The gaming machine (76) is obtained by reversing the execution order of the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the gaming machine (73). That is, the next round game after the non-specific round game can be executed as the specific round game. In the gaming machine (76) as well, as with the gaming machine (73), it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. Thus, when the variable entrance is opened in a special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area is being executed, or whether the game ball to the specific area is It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to discriminate (see through) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence / absence of the pass, etc. It is possible to improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine.

(77) In the gaming machine of (76),
The opening time of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game in the first special game, and the non-specific in the second special game The game machine characterized by having the same opening time of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the round to the end of the specific round game.

(78) In the gaming machine of (76) or (77) above,
The number of opening of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game in the first special game, and the non-specific in the second special game The gaming machine, wherein the number of opening of the variable entrance is based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the round to the end of the specific round game.

(79) In any one of the above gaming machines (73) to (78),
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 7 Image display device, 7b Production symbol display area (production symbol display part), 8 production symbols, 20 1st starting port, 21 2nd starting port, 30 1st grand prize opening, 35 2nd grand prize Mouth, 39 specific area, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub Control board (sub-control part), 100 image control board (image control part), 103a production first special figure reservation display, 103b production second special figure reservation display, 150 movable piece.

Claims (4)

Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start opening;
Special game execution means for executing a special game based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner;
A variable entrance that allows the game ball to enter by closing, and allows the game ball to enter by opening,
A movable member capable of guiding a game ball entering the variable entrance to a specific area by performing a predetermined operation;
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed the specific area;
A gaming machine equipped with
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
The variable entrance is openable in a predetermined opening pattern in the round game,
As the opening pattern of the variable entrance, at least a first opening pattern in which the opening time of the variable entrance is a predetermined time, and a second in which the opening time is shorter than the first opening pattern. An opening pattern,
As the round game, at least,
A first specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the first opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A second specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the second opening pattern and the movable member is operated;
A non-specific round game that opens the variable entrance in a predetermined opening pattern and does not operate the movable member,
A predetermined number of round games among the plurality of round games can be executed as the first specific round game or the second specific round game,
One or both of a previous round game that continues before the predetermined number of times and a rear round game that continues after the predetermined number of times, and either or both of the previous round game and the subsequent round game are It can be executed as a specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game capable of executing the first specific round game and the non-specific round game, and a second special game capable of executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game, Have
In the first special game, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, the variable entrance opening pattern in the execution period and the second special game The game machine characterized by having the same opening pattern of the variable entrance in the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine has at least one previous round game before the predetermined number of times and executes the previous round game as the non-specific round game. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine has at least one subsequent round game after the predetermined number of times, and executes the subsequent round game as the non-specific round game. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the predetermined number of round games is a first round game or a second round game.

Images